Toshiba Personal Computer M30 35 User Manual

Toshiba Personal Computer  
Satellite M30-35 Series  
Maintenance Manual  
TOSHIBA CORPORATION  
File Number 960-455  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the  
Toshiba Personal Computer Satellite M30-35 Series.  
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate  
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.  
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or  
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily  
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property  
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance  
service.  
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service  
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety  
precautions are adhered to strictly.  
Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully  
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause  
overheating, smoke or fire.  
If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model  
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong  
battery can cause the battery to explode.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The manual is divided into the following parts:  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4  
Hardware Overview describes the Satellite M30 system unit and each  
FRU.  
Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve  
FRU problems.  
Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic  
operations for maintenance service.  
Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the  
FRUs.  
Appendices The appendices describe the following:  
Handling the LCD module  
Board layout  
Pin assignments  
Keyboard scan/character codes  
Key layout  
Wiring diagrams  
BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
Reliability  
iv  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and  
operating procedures.  
Acronyms  
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in  
parentheses following their definition. For example:  
Read Only Memory (ROM)  
Keys  
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on  
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such  
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause  
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If  
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.  
User input  
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:  
DISKCOPY A: B:  
The display  
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face  
below:  
Format complete  
System transferred  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
1.9  
Features......................................................................................................................1-1  
System Unit Block Diagram......................................................................................1-7  
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External) ...........................................................1-14  
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive.........................................................................................1-15  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive......................................................................................1-18  
DVD-R/RW Drive ...................................................................................................1-19  
DVD-Multi Drive.....................................................................................................1-21  
Keyboard..................................................................................................................1-23  
TFT Color Display...................................................................................................1-24  
1.10 Power Supply...........................................................................................................1-27  
1.11 Batteries ...................................................................................................................1-30  
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 2-1  
Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................ 2-2  
Power Supply Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 2-6  
System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................ 2-17  
FDD Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-30  
HDD Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-33  
Keyboard Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-38  
Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-40  
Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2-43  
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-45  
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-47  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-48  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-52  
2.14 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting................................................................................. 2-55  
vi  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1  
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-3  
Subtest Names............................................................................................................ 3-7  
System Test................................................................................................................ 3-9  
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-12  
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-13  
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-16  
Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-19  
Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-21  
3.10 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-23  
3.11 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-24  
3.12 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-27  
3.13 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-29  
3.14 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-30  
3.15 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-31  
3.16 LAN Test ................................................................................................................. 3-32  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-33  
3.18 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-36  
3.19 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-38  
3.20 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-39  
3.21 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-41  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-42  
3.23 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-47  
3.24 Wireless LAN Test Program (Calexico).................................................................. 3-49  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Ahteros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)........................................ 3-50  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program.......................................................................... 3-53  
3.27 IEEE1394 Test Program .......................................................................................... 3-57  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.9  
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Battery Pack............................................................................................................... 4-9  
PC Card.................................................................................................................... 4-11  
SD Card.................................................................................................................... 4-13  
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-14  
Optical Drive............................................................................................................ 4-17  
Memory Module/Modem Daughter Card................................................................ 4-20  
Wireless LAN Card.................................................................................................. 4-24  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-26  
4.10 Switch Cover ASSY/Switch Membrane.................................................................. 4-29  
4.11 Display Assembly .................................................................................................... 4-32  
4.12 Touch Pad Button .................................................................................................... 4-36  
4.13 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-37  
4.14 Touch Pad ................................................................................................................ 4-39  
4.15 RTC Battery............................................................................................................. 4-41  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad Holder.............................................................................. 4-43  
4.17 CD-Key ASSY......................................................................................................... 4-46  
4.18 System Board........................................................................................................... 4-47  
4.19 CPU.......................................................................................................................... 4-50  
4.20 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-53  
4.21 Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-55  
4.22 USB Board/DC-IN Jack/Network Jack ................................................................... 4-56  
4.23 Power Board/RGB Board ........................................................................................ 4-58  
4.24 Display Mask ........................................................................................................... 4-61  
4.25 FL Inverter ............................................................................................................... 4-63  
4.26 LCD Module ............................................................................................................ 4-65  
4.27 Sensor/Switch Board................................................................................................ 4-69  
4.28 LCD Cable Wireless LAN Antenna ........................................................................ 4-70  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-76  
viii  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1  
Appendix B Board Layout ................................................................................................ B-1  
Appendix C Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1  
Appendix D Character Codes............................................................................................ D-1  
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1  
Appendix F Reliability.......................................................................................................F-1  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures............................................................................. G-1  
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures........................................................................ H-1  
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1  
Appendix J SETUP ............................................................................................................J-1  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Hardware Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1-ii  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
Chapter 1  
Contents  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
1.9  
Features.......................................................................................................................1-1  
System Unit Block Diagram.......................................................................................1-7  
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)............................................................1-14  
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................1-15  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive.......................................................................................1-18  
DVD-R/RW Drive....................................................................................................1-19  
DVD-Multi Drive ....................................................................................................1-21  
Keyboard ..................................................................................................................1-23  
TFT Color Display ...................................................................................................1-24  
1.9.1  
1.9.2  
LCD Module .......................................................................................1-24  
FL Inverter Board ...............................................................................1-26  
1.10 Power Supply............................................................................................................1-27  
1.11 Batteries....................................................................................................................1-30  
1.11.1 Main Battery .......................................................................................1-30  
1.11.2 Battery Charging Control....................................................................1-31  
1.11.3 RTC battery.........................................................................................1-32  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
Figures  
Figure 1-1  
Figure 1-2  
Figure 1-3  
Figure 1-4  
Figure 1-5  
Figure 1-6  
Figure 1-7  
Figure 1-8  
Figure 1-9  
Front of the computer .....................................................................................1-6  
System unit configuration...............................................................................1-6  
System unit block diagram .............................................................................1-7  
3.5-inch FDD (USB External)......................................................................1-14  
2.5-inch HDD ...............................................................................................1-15  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive ..........................................................................1-18  
DVD-R/RW drive.........................................................................................1-19  
DVD-Multi drive..........................................................................................1-21  
Keyboard ......................................................................................................1-23  
Figure 1-10 LCD module .................................................................................................1-24  
Tables  
Table 1-1  
Table 1-2  
Table 1-3  
Table 1-4  
Table 1-5  
Table 1-6  
Table 1-7  
Table 1-8  
Table 1-9  
Table 1-10  
Table 1-11  
3.5-inch FDD specifications.........................................................................1-14  
2.5-inch HDD specifications ........................................................................1-15  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications ....................................................1-18  
DVD-R/RW drive specifications..................................................................1-20  
DVD Multi drive specifications ...................................................................1-21  
LCD module specifications ..........................................................................1-24  
FL inverter board specifications...................................................................1-26  
Power supply output rating...........................................................................1-28  
Battery specifications ...................................................................................1-30  
Time required for quick charges...................................................................1-31  
RTC battery charging/data preservation time...............................................1-32  
1-iv  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1 Features  
1 Hardware Overview  
1
Features  
1.1 Features  
The Toshiba Satellite M30 Personal Computer uses extensive Large Scale Integration (LSI),  
and Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to provide  
compact size, minimum weight, low power usage and high reliability. This computer  
incorporates the following features and benefits: The product configuration is BTO-  
compatible so that a system can be designed to suit a specific purpose.  
Microprocessor  
The Satellite M30 computer is equipped with an Intel Banias Processor, which  
incorporates a math co-processor, a 64KB L1 cache memory and a 1MB L2 cache  
memory. The processor runs with one of the following speeds:  
Intel Banias Processor 1.40GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)  
Intel Banias Processor 1.50GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)  
Intel Banias Processor 1.60GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)  
Intel Banias Processor 1.70GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)  
This processor operates at 1.35V-0.8V and 100MHz bus clock  
Chipset  
The Satellite M30 is equipped with Intel Odem+, Intel ICH4-M and YEBISU-SS.  
Cache Memory  
64KB primary cache (in CPU) and 1MB secondary cache (in CPU)  
GPU Controller  
The computer has a nVIDIA NV34M controller. The internal VRAM is 32MB/64M,  
DDR200MHz.  
Memory  
Two DDR SO-DIMM slots are available for installation of PC2700 compatible 256,  
512MB and 1GB memory modules. The memory is expandable up to 2GB.  
Built-in HDD  
The computer has a 40GB, 60GB or 80GB internal drive. 2.5 inch x 9.5mm height.  
USB FDD  
An external two-mode 3.5-inch FDD, which connects with a USB port, supports 720KB  
and 1.44MB formats and enables booting from system FD.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.1 Features  
CD-RW/DVD Drive  
This drive is a combination of DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW Drive. . It is full-size and runs  
either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor. This drive  
reads CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed writes  
CD-R at maximum 24-speed, and writes CD-RW at maximum 24-speed.  
DVD-R/RW Drive  
A full-size DVD-R/-RW drive module lets you record data to rewritable CD/DVDs as  
well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor. It  
reads DVD-ROMs at maximum 8 speed, CD-ROMs at maximum 24 speed and CD-Rs at  
maximum 16 speed. It writes CD-R at up to 16 speed, CD-RW at up to 10 speed, DVD-R  
and DVD-RW at single speed.  
DVD Multi Drive  
This drive is a combination of CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW and DVD-RAM Drive. It is full-  
size and runs either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor.  
This drive reads CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed  
writes CD-R at maximum 16-speed, writes CD-RW at maximum 8-speed, writes DVD-R  
at maximum 2-speed, writes DVD-RW at maximum 1-speed,.and writes DVD-RAM at  
maximum 2-speed.  
Display  
The display comes in the following three types:  
15.4” WXGA-TFT color display, resolution 1280(H)×800(V), 16M colors  
A high-resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display up to  
2048(H)×1536(V), at 16M colors.  
Keyboard  
An-easy-to-use 85(US)/86(UK)-key keyboard provides a numeric keypad overlay for fast  
numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard also includes two keys  
that have special functions in MicrosoftWindows2000/X P. It supports software that  
uses a 101- or 102-key enhanced keyboard.  
Touch pad  
Touch pad is installed as a pointing device.  
Batteries  
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC  
battery (that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).  
1-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1 Features  
1 Hardware Overview  
Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)  
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard, which  
enables data transfer speeds 40 times faster than USB1.1 standard. USB1.1 is also  
supported.  
IEEE 1394 port  
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer directly  
from external devices such as digital video cameras.  
Parallel port  
The parallel port enables connection of parallel printer or other parallel devices. (ECP  
compatible)  
External monitor port  
The port enables connection of an external monitor, which is recognized automatically by  
Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) Display Data Channel (DDC) 2B  
compatible functions.  
PC card slot  
The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one 5mm Type II card. The slot support 16-  
bit PC cards and Card Bus PC cards. CardBus supports 32-bit PC cards.  
SD Card  
An SD Card Slot can accommodate Secure Digital flash memory cards with various  
capacities. SD cards let you easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and  
Personal Digital Assistants, that use SD Card flash-memory.  
Infrared port  
The infrared port is compatible with Fast InfraRed (FIR) standards enabling cableless 4  
Mbps, 1.152 Mbps, 115.2 kbps, 57.6 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 19.2 kbps or 9.6 kbps data transfer  
with Infrared Data Association (IrDA) 1.1 compatible external devices.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.1 Features  
Sound system  
The sound system is equipped with the following features:  
AC 97 Link  
Sound CODEC: STAC9750  
Stereo speakers  
Built-in Microphone (Mono)  
Volume control knob  
Stereo Headphone jack  
External microphone jack  
Video-out jack  
The video jack enables to transfer NTSC or PAL data to external devices connected with  
S-Video cable.  
Internal modem  
The internal modem is equipped as a modem daughter card (MDC).  
The internal modem provides capability for data and fax communication and supports  
V.90/92. For data reception it operates at 56,000bps and for data transmission it operates  
at 33,600bps. For fax transmission it operates at 14,400bps. It is also equipped with  
Speakerphone and TAM (Telephony Answering Machine) function. The speed of data  
transfer and fax depends on analog telephone line conditions. It has an RJ11 modem jack  
for connecting to a telephone line. Both of V.90 and V.92 is supported in USA and  
Canada. In other regions, only V.90 is available.  
Internal LAN  
The computer is equipped with LAN circuits that support Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per  
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100 BASE-Tx). It also  
supports Wakeup on LAN (WOL) and Magic Packet.  
Mini PCI Card slot (1 slot)  
Some computers in this series are equipped with a wireless LAN mini-PCI card that is  
compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread  
Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing radio technology that complies  
with the IEEE802.11 Standard (Revision A, B or G) and Turbo Mode. Revisions A and G  
support a data transfer rate up to 54 Mbit/s. Revision-B supports a data transfer rate up to  
11 Mbit/s. Turbo Mode supports a data transfer rate up to 108 Mbit/s.  
1-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1 Features  
1 Hardware Overview  
Internet button  
This button launches an Internet browser. If the computer’s power is off, you can press  
this button to turn on the computer’s power and launch the browser automatically in one  
step.  
TOSHIBA Console button  
This button launches an application automatically. The default is TOSHIBA Console.  
S-Video out button  
Pressing this button sets the display device to TV (Video out). Pressing it again returns to  
LCD.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.1 Features  
The front of the computer is shown in figure 1-1 and the system unit configuration is shown  
in figure 1-2.  
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer  
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration  
1-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.  
Internal  
Touch Pad  
Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
The system unit is composed of the following major components:  
Processor  
Intel Banias Processor 1.40GHz  
– Processor core speed: 1.40GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz  
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)  
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz  
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back  
data cache, 4-way set associative  
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set  
associative  
– Integrated NDP  
Intel Banias Processor 1.50GHz  
– Processor core speed: 1.50GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz  
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)  
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz  
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back  
data cache, 4-way set associative  
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set  
associative  
– Integrated NDP  
Intel Banias Processor 1.60GHz  
– Processor core speed: 1.60GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz  
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)  
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz  
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back  
data cache, 4-way set associative  
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set  
associative  
– Integrated NDP  
Intel Banias Processor 1.70GHz  
– Processor core speed: 1.70GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz  
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)  
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz  
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back  
data cache, 4-way set associative  
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set  
associative  
– Integrated NDP  
1-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
1 Hardware Overview  
Memory  
Two memory slots are provided. Expansion up to 2GB (2,048MB) is available.  
Supports DDR CL2/2.5  
Supports PC2700  
– 256MB: 256Mbit (16M × 16bit) chips × 8  
– 512MB: 512Mbit (32M × 8bit) chips × 16  
512Mbit (32M × 16bit) chips × 8  
– 1GB:  
512Mbit (64M × 8 bit) chips × 16  
200 pin, SO Dual In-line Memory Modules (SO-DIMM)  
2.5 volt operation  
Intel Odem+ (North Bridge)  
One Intel RG82P4300M is used.  
Features:  
– Banias Processor System Bus Support  
– DRAM Controller supporting DDR333/DDR266/DDR200, 1GB max  
– Accelerated Graphics Port Interface: adheres to AGP2.0, AGP×4 mode  
– Hub Link Interface  
– 593-ball 37.5×37.5 mm FC-BGA package  
Intel ICH4-M (South Bridge)  
One Intel 82801LAM is used.  
This gate array has the following features:  
– Hub Link Interface  
– PCI Rev2.2 Interface (6 PCI REQ/GNT Pairs)  
– BusMaster IDE Controller (Ultra ATA 100/66/33)  
– USB 1.1/2.0 Controller 6 Prots (EHCI: Enhanced Host Controller)  
– I/O APIC (ACPI 1.06)  
– SMBus2.0 Controller  
– FWH Interface (BIOS)  
– LPC Interface (EC/KBC, Super I/O)  
– IRQ Controller  
– Serial Interrupt Controller  
– Power Management Controller  
– Deeper Sleep (C4) Support  
– Suspend/Resume Control  
– AC'97 2.2 Interface  
– Internal RTC  
– Internal LAN Controller (WfM2.0)  
– 421-ball 31×31mm BGA Package  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
PC Card Controller Gate Array  
One YEBISU-SS gate array is used.  
This gate array has the following functions and components.  
– PCI interface (PCI Revision2.2)  
– CardBus/PC Card controller (Yenta2 Version2.2)  
– SD memory card controller (SDHC Ver.1.2)  
– SD IO card controller (Ver.1.0)  
– SmartMedia controller (SMHC Ver.01/SMIL1.0)  
– SIO (UART) controller (MS Debug Port Specification Ver.1.0)  
– Docking station interface  
– Q switch control, reset control  
– External device interface  
Firmware Hub (FWH)  
One Intel 82802AB8 is used.  
This gate array has the following features:  
– Intel platform compatibility  
– Firmware hub hardware interface mode  
– Industry-standard packages  
– Two configurable interfaces  
– 4Mbits of flash memory for platform code/data nonvolatile storage  
– Address/Address-Multiplexed (A/A Mux) interface/mode  
– Case temperature operating range  
– Vcc: 3.3V ± 0.3V  
– Vpp: 3.3V and 12V for fast programming (80 hours maximum)  
– 4Mbits of flash memory are used as shown below:  
– 64KB are used for VGA-BIOS.  
– 192KB are used for system BIOS.  
– 8KB are used for plug and play data area.  
– 8KB are used for password security.  
– 16KB are used for boot strap.  
– 64KB are used for ACPI P code.  
– 64KB are used for LOGO.  
– 64KB are reserved for LAN BIOS.  
– 32KB are reserved.  
1-10  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
1 Hardware Overview  
GPU Controller  
One nVIDIA NV34M chip is used. The GPU controller incorporates graphics accelerator,  
video accelerator.  
– VRAM 32MB (4M × 32 × 2)/64MB (4M × 32 × 4) DDR200MHz  
– AGP bus R2.0 x 4  
– LCD Interface LVDS 2ch  
– TV Encoder: S-Video 4pin connectorTvxpress2  
Sound Controller  
AC-Link (in the South Bridge) and STAC975051T (Sigmatel made) are used.  
Amplifier, Internal microphone, internal stereo speakers, stereo headphone  
connector, external microphone connector and volume control knob are mounted.  
EC/KBC (Embedded Controller/Keyboard Controller)  
One Mitsubishi M306K9FCLRP micon chip functions as both EC and KBC.  
EC  
This controller controls the following functions:  
– Power supply sequence  
– Thermal conditions  
– LEDs  
– Beep  
– Device ON/OFF  
– Fan speed  
– Universal I/O port  
– Docker Docking Sequence  
– Battery capacity check  
– Forced reset  
– Flash rewriting  
– EC interface  
– I2C communication  
– EC access  
– Slim Select Bay Control  
KBC  
This controller has the following functions:  
– Scan controller to check status of keyboard matrix  
– Interface controller between the keyboard scan controller and the system  
Control of switching and simultaneous operation of the accupoint/external  
PS/2 mouse and of the internal keyboard/external PS/2 keyboard  
PSC (Power Supply Controller)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
One TMP87PM48U chip is used.  
This controller controls the power sources.  
Clock Generator  
One ICS950812CGT is used.  
This device generates the system clock.  
Modem Controller  
One built-in Askey-made 1456VQL4A(INT) modem card  
This controller has the following functions:  
– Digital line protection support  
– Ring wake up support  
– AC97 interface  
– Supports V.92 56k Modem/Fax.  
Internal LAN Controller  
One Kinnereth-R (82562EP) chip is used.  
– Supports 10/100Mbit Ethernet.  
– Supports LED and WOL.  
Wireless LAN  
– Mini-PCI Type III 1slot  
– Supports Kill SW.  
– Supports Wireless LAN through PCMCIA  
– 802.11b, 802.11a/b: Intel-made  
– 802.11b/g, 802.11a/b/g: Atheros-made  
Super I/O  
One LPC 47N227 chip is used.  
– This gate array has the following features:  
– Floppy Disk Controller  
– Serial Port Controller  
– Infrared Communications Controller  
– Parallel Port Controller  
IEEE1394  
One TSB43AB22 is used.  
1-12  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram  
1 Hardware Overview  
Sensor  
Thermal Sensor: One ADM1032AR chip is used.  
LCD Sensor: One NRS-701-1015T is used.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.3 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)  
1.3 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)  
The 3.5-inch USB FDD is a thin, high-performance reliable drive that supports 720KB and  
1.44MB.  
The FDD is shown in figure 1-4. The specifications for the FDD are listed in Table 1-1.  
Figure 1-4 3.5-inch FDD (USB External)  
Table 1-1 3.5-inch FDD specifications  
Items  
FDD part  
USB  
720KB mode  
1.44MB mode  
Data transfer  
rate  
500K bits/second  
250K bits/second  
Full speed mode (12M bits/second)  
300rpm 360rpm  
5.3 track/mm (135TPI)  
Disk rotation speed  
Track density  
1-14  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
The removable HDD is a random access non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable  
2.5-inch magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads.  
The computer supports a 40GB, 60GB and 80GB HDD.  
The HDD is shown in figure 1-5. Specifications are listed in Table 1-2.  
Figure 1-5 2.5-inch HDD  
Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications (1/2)  
Parameter  
Specifications  
TOSHIBA  
HDD2183  
69.85  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
HDD2182B  
HDD2184B  
Outline  
Width (mm)  
dimensions Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
9.5  
100  
Weight (g)  
99 max.  
102 max.  
Parameter  
Specifications  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
G8BC00013610  
70 max  
G8C0000Z410  
G8C0000Z610  
Outline  
Width (mm)  
69.85±0.25  
9.5±0.25  
100±0.25  
95 max.  
69.85±0.25  
9.5±0.25  
100±0.25  
99 max.  
dimensions Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
9.5±0.25  
100±0.45  
Weight (g)  
95 max.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
Parameter  
Specifications  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
TOSHIBA  
HDD2188B  
69.85  
GBC000Z810  
GBC000014810  
Outline  
Width (mm)  
69.85±0.25  
9.5±0.25  
100±0.25  
99 max  
69.85±0.25  
9.5±0.25  
100.2±0.25  
102  
dimensions Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
9.5  
100  
Weight (g)  
99 max.  
Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications(2/2)  
Specifications  
Parameter  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
HDD2183  
TOSHIBA  
HDD2184  
HDD2182B  
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
40GB  
60GB  
60GB  
5400  
4200  
154.3-298.0  
100 max.  
Data transfer speed  
(Mb/sec)  
202.9-373.3  
Interface transfer rate  
(MB/s)  
(Ultra DMA mode)  
Track density (Ktpi)  
78.9  
Access Time  
Average seek (sec)  
12  
4 typ.  
10 max.  
Start time (sec)  
4 typ.  
Specifications  
Parameter  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
G8C000Z410  
G8C0000Z610  
G8BC00013610  
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
40GB  
60GB  
4200  
350 typ.  
5400  
Data transfer speed  
(Mb/sec)  
263.2-401.6  
Interface transfer rate  
(MB/s)  
100 max.  
(Ultra DMA mode)  
Track density (Ktpi)  
85  
96  
Access Time  
Average seek (Read)  
Average seek (Write)  
12 typ.  
14 typ.  
13 typ.  
-
5
5 typ  
(Power on)  
Start time (sec)  
(Power on)  
1-16  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
1 Hardware Overview  
Specifications  
Parameter  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
TOSHIBA  
GBC000Z810  
GBC00014810  
HDD2188B  
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
80GB  
80GB  
4200  
4200  
5400  
Data transfer speed  
175.0-341.78  
(Mbits/s)  
350 typ  
450 max  
100 max.  
Interface transfer rate  
(MB/s)  
(Ultra DMA mode)  
Track density (Ktpi)  
96  
88.1  
96  
Access Time (ms)  
Average seek (Read)  
Average seek (Write)  
12 typ  
14 typ  
12 typ  
14 typ  
12  
-
5
3.5  
(Power on)  
Start time (sec)  
4
(Power on)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.5 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive  
1.5 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive  
This drive is a combination of DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW Drive. . It is full-size and runs  
either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor. This drive reads  
CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed writes CD-R at  
maximum 24-speed, and writes CD-RW at maximum 24-speed.  
The CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive is shown in figure 1-6. Specifications are listed in Table 1-3.  
Figure 1-6 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive  
Table 1-3 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications  
Matushita G8CC0001C210  
Item  
DVD-ROM mode  
CD-ROM mode  
CD-R/CD-RW  
(Write)  
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)  
33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 2)  
16.6 (PIO Mode 0 to 4, Multi word DMA mode 0 to 2)  
Average Access time (ms)  
Data Buffer Capacity (MB)  
Supported Format  
180 typ  
130 typ  
2
CD:  
CD-R, CD-RW  
CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-  
ROM XA, Photo CD, Video CD,  
CD-Extra, CD-text  
DVD:  
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-ROM, DVD-R (3.9G,  
4.7G), DVD-RW, DVD-RAM (4.7G)  
1-18  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.6 DVD-R/RW  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.6 DVD-R/RW  
A full-size DVD-R/-RW drive module lets you record data to rewritable CD/DVDs as well  
as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor. It reads  
DVD-ROMs at maximum 8 speed, CD-ROMs at maximum 24 speed and CD-Rs at  
maximum 16 speed. It writes CD-R at up to 16 speed, CD-RW at up to 10 speed, DVD-R  
and DVD-RW at single speed.  
The CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive is shown in figure 1-7. Specifications are listed in Table 1-4.  
Figure 1-7 DVD-R/RW drive  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.6 DVD-R/RW  
Table -4 DVD-R/RW drive specifications  
Toshiba  
SD-R6112  
Item  
ATAPI Burst (MB/sec)  
33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 2)  
16.6 (PIO Mode 0 to 4, Multi word DMA  
mode 0 to 2)  
Average access time (ms)  
DVD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
DVD-RAM  
115  
105  
170  
Data buffer (MB)  
2
Speed (Read)  
DVD-ROM  
DVD-RAM  
CD-ROM  
8x  
1x  
24x  
Speed (Write)  
CD-R  
4x, 16x  
CD-RW  
4x,10x (High Speed)  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
1x, 2x  
1x  
Supported format (Read)  
CD:  
CD-DA, CD+(E)G, CD-MIDI,  
CD-TEXT, CD-ROM,  
CD-ROM XA, CD-I,  
CD-I Bridge (Photo-CD, Video-CD)  
Multisession CD (Photo-CD,  
CD-EXTRA, CD-R, CD-RW,  
Portfolio),  
CD-R, CD-RW  
DVD :  
DVD-ROM (DVD-5, DVD-9,  
DVD-10, DVD-18)  
DVD-R (Ver.1.0, Ver.2.1)  
DVD-RW(Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1)  
DVD-RAM(Ver.2.1)  
1-20  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.7 DVD-Multi (CD-R/RW DVD-RAM/R/RW) Drive  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.7 DVD-Multi (CD-R/RW DVD-RAM/R/RW) Drive  
This drive is a combination of CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW and DVD-RAM Drive. It is full-size  
and runs either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor. This  
drive reads CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed writes  
CD-R at maximum 16-speed, writes CD-RW at maximum 8-speed, writes DVD-R at  
maximum 2-speed, writes DVD-RW at maximum 1-speed,.and writes DVD-RAM at  
maximum 2-speed.  
The DVD multi drive is shown in Figure 1-8. Specifications for the DVD multi drive are  
described in table 1-5.  
Figure 1-8 DVD-Multi drive  
Table 1-5 DVD-Multi drive specifications (1/2)  
TEAC  
G8CC00013210  
Matsushita  
G8CC00019210  
Item  
ATAPI Burst (MB/sec)  
33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 2)  
16.6 (PIO Mode 0 to 4, Multi word DMA mode 0 to 2)  
Average access time (ms)  
DVD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
130 average.  
110 average  
180 typ. (Random)  
150 typ. (Random)  
Data buffer (MB)  
2
Speed (Read)  
DVD-ROM  
DVD-Video  
CD-ROM  
CD-DA  
DVD-RW  
8x (CAV)  
4x (CAV)  
24x (CAV)  
8x (CLV)  
4x (CAV)  
4x (CAV)  
8x max.  
4
24x max. (CAV)  
8
4
4
DVD-R/DVD-RW  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.7 DVD-Multi (CD-R/RW DVD-RAM/R/RW) Drive  
Table 1-5 DVD-Multi drive specifications (2/2)  
TEAC  
G8CC00013210  
Matsushita  
G8CC00019210  
Item  
Speed (Write)  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
16x max.(ZCLV)  
10x (CLV)  
2x (CLV)  
16x (ZoneCLV)  
8x (CLV)  
DVD-R  
2x (CLV)  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RAM  
1x (CLV)  
2x (ZLV)  
1x (CLV)  
2x (ZCLV) (4.7GB)  
Supported format  
CD: CD-DA  
CD: CD-DA  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-R/W  
CD-R  
CD-ROMXA  
CD-I Ready  
Photo-CD  
Video CD  
Cd-Extra(CD+)  
CD-TEXT  
CD-ROM XA Mode 2  
(Form 1, Form2)  
Photo-CD  
(single/multi-session)  
Enhanced CD  
CD-TEXT  
DVD :DVD-ROM  
DVD-R (General.  
Authoring)  
DVD :DVD-ROM  
DVD-Video  
DVD-RAM(4.7G,  
2.6G)  
DVD-R (3.9GB,  
4.7GB)  
DVD-RW(Ver. 1.1)  
DVD-RAM( 2.6G,  
4.7GB,9.4GB)  
1-22  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.8 Keyboard  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.8 Keyboard  
The keyboard is mounted 85(US)/86(UK) keys that consist of character key and control key,  
and in conformity with JIS. The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system  
board and controlled by the keyboard controller.  
Figure 1-9 is a view of the keyboard.  
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.  
Figure 1-9 Keyboard  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.9 TFT Color Display  
1.9 TFT Color Display  
The TFT color display consists of 15.4-inch WXGA LCD module and FL inverter board.  
1.9.1  
LCD Module  
A high-resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display up to  
2048(H)×1536(V), at 16M colors.  
Figure 1-10 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-6 lists the specifications.  
Figure 1-10 LCD module  
Table 1-6 LCD module specifications (1/5)  
Specifications  
Item  
15.4-inch WXGA (G33C0001D110)  
Number of Dots  
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)  
0.25875 (H) x 0.25875 (V)  
331.2 (W) x 207(H)  
Dot spacing (mm)  
Display range (mm)  
1-24  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.9 TFT Color Display  
1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-6 LCD module specifications (2/5)  
Specifications  
Item  
15.4-inch WXGA (G33C0001F110)  
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)  
Number of Dots  
Dot spacing (mm)  
Display range (mm)  
0.25875 (H) x 0.25875 (V)  
332.16(H) x 207.6(V)  
Table 1-6 LCD module specifications (3/5)  
Specifications  
15.4-inch WXGA (G33C0001H110)  
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)  
Item  
Number of Dots  
Dot spacing (mm)  
Display range (mm)  
0.2595 (H) x 0.2595 (V)  
332.16 (W) x 207.6 (H)  
Table 1-6 LCD module specifications (4/5)  
Specifications  
15.4-inch WXGA(CSV) (G33C0001E110)  
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)  
Item  
Number of Dots  
Dot spacing (mm)  
Display range (mm)  
0.25875 (H) x 0.25875 (V)  
331.2 (W) x 207 (H)  
Table 1-6 LCD module specifications (5/5)  
Specifications  
15.4-inch WXGA(CSV) (G33C0001G110)  
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)  
Item  
Number of Dots  
Dot spacing (mm)  
Display range (mm)  
0.25875 (H) x 0.25875 (V)  
331.2 (W) x 207 (H)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.9 TFT Color Display  
1.9.2  
FL Inverter Board  
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module FL.  
Table 1-7 lists the FL inverter board specifications.  
Table 1-7 FL inverter board specifications  
Item  
Voltage (V)  
Specifications  
Input  
DC 5  
7
Power (W)  
Voltage (V)  
Current (mA)  
Power (mA)  
Output  
750  
6.00  
5W/7VA  
1-26  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.10 Power Supply  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.10 Power Supply  
The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the  
following functions:  
1. Checks power input to determine:  
Whether the AC adaptor is connected to the computer  
Whether the battery pack is installed and supplying power  
2. Checks power supply’s internal controls:  
Battery pack charging: start, stop and voltage supplied to the battery pack  
Power supply system: Power supplied from a DC power source (AC adaptor)  
Faulty power supply: Executes forced shutdown if needed  
Logic: Power supply to various circuits  
Charging current to PWM control IC for battery pack charging  
3. Controls the following aspects of the logic system  
Power supply to gate arrays  
Power on/off  
4. Indicates the following:  
DC IN (sets LED to orange or blue)  
Battery icon (sets LED to orange or blue)  
Faulty power supply by low battery  
5. Interface for the following:  
BIOS via EC/KBC  
Function mode of power supply  
6. Detects the following:  
Input voltage to logic system  
Input voltage, overvoltage and input/output to battery pack  
Battery pack’s internal temperature  
Input voltage to DC power supply (output from AC adaptor)  
The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-8.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.10 Power Supply  
Table 1-8 Power supply output rating (1/2)  
Name  
Voltage (V)  
1.468-0.748  
Use  
PPV  
CPU  
MCH1R2-  
P1V  
1.2  
Odem  
PTV  
2R5-B2V  
2R5-P2V  
1R25-B1V  
PGV  
1.075  
2.5  
CPU, ADM1032, Odem, ICH4-M  
Odem, SDRAM  
NV34  
2.5  
1.25  
1.2-1.5  
3.3  
SDRAM  
NV34  
LAN-E3V  
S3V  
ICH4-M, KINNERETH  
ICH4-M, EC/KBC  
YEBISU3S, PC Card ,MDC  
3.3  
B3V  
3.3  
Clock Generator, ICH4-M, FWH, mini-PCI, Super I/O,FIR,  
IEEE 1394, LCD, STAC9750  
P3V  
3.3  
SD-P3V  
E5V  
3.3  
5
SD  
USB  
CD-E5V  
B5V  
5
CD-ROM  
5
PC Card  
P5V  
5
HDD, KB,LED, Parallel, LCD  
AN12940  
SND-E5V  
1R8-P1V  
1R5-P1V  
1R5-S1V  
5
1.8  
1.5  
1.5  
Odem, ICH4-M  
Odem, ICH4-M, NV34  
ICH4-M  
LAN1R5-  
E1V  
1.5  
ICH4-M  
1-28  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.10 Power Supply  
1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-8 Power supply board output rating (2/2)  
Name  
Voltage (V)  
Use  
S5V  
MCV  
5
5
OZ168  
PSC  
A4R7-P4V  
4.7  
STAC9750, MIC  
CD, Headphone  
CDA4R7-E4V  
R3V  
4.7  
2.0-3.3  
ICH4-M  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.11 Batteries  
1.11 Batteries  
The computer has three types of batteries as follows:  
Main battery pack  
RTC battery  
The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-9.  
Table 1-9 Battery specifications  
Battery name  
Main battery  
Material  
Lithium-Ion (6-cell)  
Output voltage  
10.8 V  
Capacity  
4,400mAh  
8,800mAh  
16  
Lithium-Ion (12 cell)  
Nickel-metal hydride  
10.8 V  
2.4 V  
RTC battery  
1.11.1  
Main Battery  
The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor  
is not attached. The main battery maintains the state of the computer when the computer  
enters in resume mode.  
1-30  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.11 Batteries  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.11.2  
Battery Charging Control  
Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The microprocessor  
controls whether the charge is on or off and detects a full charge when the AC adaptor and  
battery are attached to the computer. The system charges the battery using quick charge.  
Quick Battery Charge  
When the AC adaptor is attached, there are two types of quick charge: quick charge 1 when  
the system is powered off and quick charge 2 when the system is powered on.  
Table 1-10 Time required for quick charges  
Status  
Charging time  
About 3.4 hours  
12 cell  
6 cell  
Quick charge 1  
(Power off)  
About 2.7 hours  
Quick charge 2  
(Power on)  
12 cell  
About 8.0 to 20.0 or longer  
6 cell  
About 4.0 to 10.0 or longer  
NOTE: The time required for quick charge 2 is affected by the amount of power the system  
is consuming. Use of the fluorescent lamp and frequent disk access diverts power and  
lengthens the charge time.  
If any of the following occurs, the battery quick charge process stops.  
1. The battery becomes fully charged.  
2. The AC adaptor or battery is removed.  
3. The battery or output voltage is abnormal.  
Detection of full charge  
A full charge is detected only when the battery is charging at quick charge. A full charge is  
detected under any of the following conditions:  
1. The current in the battery charging circuit drops under the predetermined limit.  
2. The charging time exceeds the fixed limit.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Hardware Overview  
1.11 Batteries  
1.11.3  
RTC battery  
The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information  
in memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-11 lists the charging time and data  
preservation period of the RTC battery.  
Table 1-11 RTC battery charging/data preservation time  
Status  
Charging Time (power on)  
Data preservation period (full charge)  
Time  
8 hours  
1 month  
1-32  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2-ii  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Chapter 2  
Contents  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 2-1  
Troubleshooting Flowchart ....................................................................................... 2-2  
Power Supply Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 2-6  
Procedure 1 Power LED Check ...................................................................... 2-6  
Procedure 2 Error Code Check ....................................................................... 2-8  
Procedure 3 Connection Check..................................................................... 2-14  
Procedure 4 Charge Check............................................................................ 2-15  
Procedure 5 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-16  
System Board Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 2-17  
Procedure 1 Message Check ......................................................................... 2-18  
Procedure 2 Debugging Port Check on Boot Mode...................................... 2-20  
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-28  
Procedure 4 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-29  
FDD Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-30  
Procedure 1 FDD Head Cleaning Check....................................................... 2-30  
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-31  
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Replacement Check............................... 2-32  
HDD Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 2-33  
Procedure 1 Message Check ......................................................................... 2-33  
Procedure 2 Partition Check.......................................................................... 2-34  
Procedure 3 Format Check............................................................................ 2-35  
Procedure 4 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-36  
Procedure 5 Connector Check and Replacement Check............................... 2-37  
Keyboard Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 2-38  
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-38  
Procedure 2 Connector and Replacement Check.......................................... 2-39  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
Display Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 2-40  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 1 External Monitor Check............................................................ 2-40  
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-40  
Procedure 3 Connector and Cable Check...................................................... 2-41  
Procedure 4 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-42  
Optical Drive Troubleshooting................................................................................ 2-43  
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-43  
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check............................... 2-44  
2.9  
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 2-45  
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-45  
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check............................... 2-46  
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-47  
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-47  
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check............................... 2-47  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 2-48  
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check ................................................. 2-48  
Procedure 2 Antennas' Connection Check.................................................... 2-49  
Procedure 3 Antenna Check.......................................................................... 2-50  
Procedure 4 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-51  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 2-52  
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-52  
Procedure 2 Connector Check....................................................................... 2-53  
Procedure 3 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-54  
2.14 SD Card SlotTroubleshooting ................................................................................. 2-55  
Procedure 1 Check on Windows................................................................... 2-55  
Procedure 2 Connector/Replacement Check................................................ 2-55  
2-iv  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Figures  
Figure 2-1  
Figure 2-2  
Figure 2-3  
Troubleshooting flowchart ............................................................................ 2-3  
A set of tool for debug port test................................................................... 2-20  
Antenna test cable ....................................................................................... 2-50  
Tables  
Table 2-1  
Table 2-2  
Table 2-3  
Table 2-4  
Table 2-5  
Table 2-6  
Battery Icon ................................................................................................... 2-6  
DC IN icon .................................................................................................... 2-7  
Error code ...................................................................................................... 2-9  
Debugging port boot mode status................................................................ 2-21  
FDD error code and status........................................................................... 2-31  
Hard disk drive error code and status.......................................................... 2-36  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2-vi  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1 Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2
2.1 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 2 describes how to determine if a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is  
causing the computer to malfunction. The FRUs covered are:  
1. Power supply  
5. Keyboard  
6. Display  
9. LAN  
2. System Board  
3. Floppy Disk Drive  
4. Hard Disk Drive  
10. Wireless LAN  
11. Sound components  
12. SD Card Slot  
7. Optical Drive  
8. Modem  
The Diagnostics Disk operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed Replacement  
Procedures are given in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
The following tools are necessary for implementing the troubleshooting procedures:  
1. Diagnostics Disk  
2. Phillips screwdriver (2 mm)  
3. LH-STIX screwdriver (in some models)  
4. Toshiba MS-DOS system disk(s)  
(You must install the following onto the disk: SYS.COM, FORMAT.COM,  
FDISK.COM and FDISK.EXE)  
5. Formatted work disk for floppy disk drive testing  
6. Cleaning kit for floppy disk drive troubleshooting  
7. Parallel port wraparound connector  
8. PC card wraparound connector  
9. Multimeter  
10. External USB FDD  
11. External USB keyboard and Mouse  
12. Headphone  
13. Microphone  
14. USB test module and USB cable  
15. TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK (ZA1217P01/P000204190)  
16. CD-RW Media (RICOH-made x4 recommended)  
17. DVD-ROM TSD-1 (TOSHIBA-EMI DVD Test Media)  
18. Music CD  
19. RJ11 connector checker  
20. Speaker  
21. Personal computer that can communicate by wireless LAN for wireless LAN  
troubleshooting  
22. Antenna test cable  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which troubleshooting procedures  
to execute. Before going through the flowchart steps, verify the following:  
Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the  
password. If the user has forgotten the system password, perform the following  
procedure at the appropriate step in the flowchart in Figure 2-1:  
Verify with the customer that Toshiba Windows is installed on the hard disk. Non-  
Windows operating systems can cause the computer to malfunction.  
Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.  
Make sure the External USB floppy disk drive is empty.  
2-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)  
2-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The  
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the  
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the  
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:  
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, real timer test, perform the  
System Board and Processor Module Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.  
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the FDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.5.  
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.6.  
4. If an error is detected on the keyboard test, perform the Keyboard Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.7.  
5. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.8.  
6. If an error is detected on the Optical Drive test, perform the Optical Drive  
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.9.  
7. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.10.  
8. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures  
in Section 2.11.  
9. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN  
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.12.  
10. If an error is detected on the sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.13.  
11. If an error is detected on the SD card test, perform the SD card slot Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.14.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power  
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures  
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:  
Procedure 1: Icon Check  
Procedure 2: Error Code Check  
Procedure 3: Connection Check  
Procedure 4: Charge Check  
Procedure 5: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Icon Check  
The following Icons indicate the power supply status:  
Battery icon  
DC IN icon  
The power supply controller displays the power supply status through the Battery icon and  
the DC IN icon as listed in the tables below. To check the power supply status, install a  
battery pack and connect an AC adapter.  
Table 2-1 Battery Icon  
Battery LED  
Lights orange  
Lights blue  
Power supply status  
Quick charge  
Battery is fully charged and AC adapter is connected.  
Blinks orange  
The battery level becomes low while operating the computer on battery  
(even intervals)  
*1  
power.  
*2  
Flashes orange  
Doesn’t light  
The power switch is pressed on when the battery level is low.  
Any condition other than those above  
*1 Low Battery Hibernation will be executed soon.  
*2 Low Battery Hibernation has already been executed.  
2-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Table 2-2 DC IN icon  
DC IN icon  
Power supply status  
Lights blue  
DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.  
*3  
Blinks orange  
Doesn’t light  
Power supply malfunction  
Any condition other than those above  
*3 When the power supply controller detects a malfunction, the DC IN LED  
blinks and an error code is displayed.  
If the icon blinks, execute the followings:  
1. Remove the battery and AC adapter to cut power supply to the computer.  
2. Reinstall the battery and AC adapter.  
If the LED still blinks, perform the followings:  
Check 1 If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.  
Check 2 If the DC IN icon does not light blue, go to Procedure 3.  
Check 3 If the battery icon does not light orange or blue, go to Procedure 4.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Error Code Check  
If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks orange. The  
blink pattern indicates an error as shown below.  
Start  
Off for 2 seconds  
Error code (8 bit)  
“1”  
On for one second  
On for a half second  
Off for a half second  
“0”  
Interval between data bits  
The error code begins with the least significant digit.  
Example: Error code = 12h (Error codes are given in hexadecimal format.)  
2-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 1 Convert the DC IN icon blink pattern into the hexadecimal error code and  
compare it to the tables below.  
The error code begins with the least significant digit.  
Error code  
Table 2-3 Error code  
Error code  
1*h  
Where Error occurs  
DC Power (AC Adapter)  
2*h  
The 1st battery  
4*h  
S3V output (3.3V)  
5*h  
1R5-C1V output (1.51V)  
1R8-C1V output (1.804V)  
PPV output (CPU core voltage)  
1R2-P1V output (1.21V)  
E5V output (5.0V)  
6*h  
7*h  
8*h  
9*h  
A*h  
E3V output (3.3V)  
B*h  
2R5-P2V output (for VGA: 2.51V)  
PGV output (for VGA core: 1.20V)  
1R25-P1V output (1.251V)  
2R5-B2V output (2.51V)  
C*h  
D*h  
E*h  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
Check 1 Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.  
DC IN  
Error code  
10h  
Meaning  
AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5 V.  
11h  
Advanced Port Replicator output voltage is over 16.5 V.  
Current from the DC power supply is over the limit (7.00 A).  
12h  
13h  
Current from the DC power supply is over the limit (0.5 A), when there  
is no load.  
14h  
Current sensing IC is not normal, when there is no load.  
Main Battery  
Error code  
20h  
Meaning  
Over voltage has been detected.  
21h  
Main battery charge current is over 7.00 A.  
Main battery discharge current is over 0.5 A, when there is no load.  
22h  
23h  
Main battery charge current is over 4.3 A, when the AC adapter is not  
directly connected.  
24h  
25h  
Current sensing IC is not normal, when there is no load.  
Main battery charge current is over 0.3 A.  
S3V output  
Error code  
40h  
Meaning  
S3V voltage is 3.14 V or under, when the computer is powered on/off.  
S3V voltage is 3.14 V or under at power on.  
45h  
1R5-C1V output  
Error code  
50h  
Meaning  
1R5-C1V voltage is over 1.80 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
51h  
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
52h  
53h  
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or under, when the computer is  
suspended.  
54h  
55h  
1R5-C1V voltage is not normal, when the computer is suspended.  
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or under at power on.  
2-10  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
1R8-C1V output  
Error code  
Meaning  
60h  
61h  
1R8-C1V voltage is over 2.16 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53 V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
62h  
63h  
64h  
65h  
1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53 V or under, when the computer is suspended.  
1R8-C1V voltage is not normal, when the computer is suspended.  
1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or under at power on.  
PPV output  
Error code  
70h  
Meaning  
PPV voltage is over 1.80 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or under, when the computer is powered on.  
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or over, when the computer is powered off.  
71h  
72h  
73h  
1R2-P1V output  
Error code  
80h  
Meaning  
1R2-P1V voltage is over 1.44 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
81h  
1R2-P1V voltage is 1.02 V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
82h  
83h  
84h  
1R2-P1V voltage is 1.02 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
1R2-P1V voltage is 1.02 V or over, when the computer is powered off.  
1R2-P1V voltage is 1.02 V or under, when the computer is suspended.  
E5V output  
Error code  
90h  
Meaning  
E5V voltage is over 6.00V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or under, when the computer is powered on.  
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or over, when the computer is powered off.  
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or under, when the computer is suspended.  
91h  
92h  
93h  
94h  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
E3V output  
Error code  
Meaning  
A0h  
A1h  
A2h  
A3h  
A4h  
E3V voltage is over 3.96 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or under, when the computer is powered on.  
E3V voltage is 2 .81 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or over, when the computer is powered off.  
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or under when the computer is suspended.  
2R5-P2V output  
Error code  
B0h  
Meaning  
2R5-P2V voltage is over 3.00 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
B1h  
2R5-P2V voltage is 2.125 V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
B2h  
B3h  
2R5-P2V voltage is 2.125 V or under, when the computer is booting  
up.  
2R5-P2V voltage is 2.125 V or over, when the computer is powered  
off.  
PGV output  
Error code  
C0h  
Meaning  
PGV voltage is over 1.62V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
PGV voltage is 2.125 V or under, when the computer is powered on.  
PGV voltage is 2.125 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
PGV voltage is 2.125 V or over, when the computer is powered off.  
PGV voltage is 2.125 V or under when the computer is suspended.  
C1h  
C2h  
C3h  
C4h  
2-12  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
1R25-P1V output  
Error code  
Meaning  
D0h  
1R25-P1V voltage is over 1.50 V, when the computer is powered  
on/off.  
D1h  
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
D2h  
D3h  
1R25-P1V voltage 1.063 V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or over, when the computer is powered  
off.  
D4h  
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or under, when the computer is  
suspended.  
2R5-B2V output  
Error code  
E0h  
Meaning  
2R5-B2V voltage is over 3.00 V, when the computer is powered on/off.  
E1h  
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or under, when the computer is powered  
on.  
E2h  
E3h  
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or under, when the computer is booting up.  
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or over, when the computer is powered  
off.  
E4h  
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or under when the computer is  
suspended.  
Check 2 In the case of error code 10h or 12h:  
Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into  
the DC IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly,  
go to the following step:  
Connect a new AC adaptor and/or AC power cord, if necessary. If the error  
still exists, go to Procedure 5.  
Check 3 In the case of error code 2Xh:  
Make sure the battery pack is correctly installed in the computer. If the battery  
pack is correctly installed, go to the following step:  
Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the error still exists, go to  
Procedure 5.  
Check 4 For any other error, go to Procedure 5.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
Procedure 3  
Connection Check  
The power supply wiring diagram is shown below:  
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.  
Check 1 Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Check the power cable for  
breaks. If the power cord is damaged, connect a new AC power cord. If there is no  
damage, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the  
PJ8800 DC IN 15 V socket and AC adaptor inlet/wall outlet, respectively. If these  
cables are connected correctly, go to Check 3.  
Check 3 Make sure the DC IN input port where an AC adaptor’s DC output plug is  
connected is firmly secured to the system board.  
If the DC IN input port is loose, go to Procedure 5.  
If it is not loose, go to Check 4.  
Check 4 Use a multimeter to make sure the AC adaptor output voltage is close to 15 V. If  
the output is several percent lower than 15 V, go to Check 5. If the output is close  
to 15 V, go to Check 6.  
Check 5 Connect a new AC adaptor or AC power cord.  
If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.  
If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 6.  
Check 6 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is  
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.  
2-14  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 4  
Charge Check  
The power supply may not charge the battery pack. Perform the following procedures:  
1. Reinstall the battery pack.  
2. Attach the AC adaptor and turn on the power. If you cannot turn on the power, go to  
Procedure 5.  
3. Run the Diagnostic test, go to System test and execute subtest 06 (Quick charge)  
described in Chapter 3.  
4. When charge is complete, the diagnostics test displays the result code. Check the  
result code against the table below and perform any necessary check.  
Result code  
Contents  
The battery is charging normally.  
The battery is fully charged.  
Check items  
Normal  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Normal  
The AC adaptor is not connected.  
The AC adaptor’s output voltage is not normal.  
The battery is not installed.  
Check 1  
Check 1  
Check 2  
Check 3  
Check 4  
Check 2  
Check 5  
The battery’s output voltage is not normal.  
The battery’s temperature is not normal.  
A bad battery is installed.  
Any other problems.  
Check 1 Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN  
socket and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC  
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary).  
Check 2 Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go  
to Check 3.  
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the  
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.  
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal  
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.  
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged,  
go to Procedure 5.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
Procedure 5  
Replacement Check  
The system board processor module may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the  
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. Check the  
connection between the AC adaptor and system board. After checking the connections,  
perform the following Check 1:  
Check 1 Replace the AC adaptor with a new one. If the AC adaptor still does not function  
properly, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps described in Chapter  
4, Replacement Procedures.  
2-16  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the system board is defective or not. Start with  
Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed. The procedures described  
in this section are:  
Procedure 1: Message Check  
Procedure 2: Debugging port status Check  
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 4: Replacement Check  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
Procedure 1  
Message Check  
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed  
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.  
If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.  
If nothing is displayed, go to Procedure 2.  
If an operating system is properly loaded, go to Procedure 4.  
Check 1 If one of the following error messages displays on the screen, press the Run  
Setup key as the message instructs. These errors occur, when the system  
configuration preserved in the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the  
same as the actual configuration or when the data is lost.  
If you press the Run Setup key as the message instructs, the SETUP screen  
appears to set the system configuration. If any error message is displayed, perform  
Check 2.  
If error message (a) appears often when the power is turned on, replace the RTC  
battery. If any other error message displays, perform Check 2.  
(a) 0250: RTC battery is low  
(b) 0251: CMOS checksum is inconsistent  
(c) 0271: Check date and time settings  
(d) 0290: ROM data is invalid  
Check 2 If the following error message appears on the screen, press the Continue key as  
the message instructs. This error occurs, when consumption of battery or failure  
of system board loses the resumed data. Go to Procedure 3.  
WARNING: RESUME FAILURE.  
If any other error message displays, perform Check 3.  
2-18  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 3 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system  
stops or an error message appears.  
If error message (5) appears, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures in  
Section 2.7.  
If error message (1), (2), (3) or (4) appears, go to the HDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.6.  
If error message (7) appears, go to the FDD Troubleshooting Procedures in  
Section 2.5.  
(1) 0201: Failure IDE#0  
(2) 0202: Failure IDE#1  
(3) 0203: Failure IDE#2  
(4) 0204: Failure IDE#3  
(5) 0212: Keyboard Controller Failed  
(6) 0260: System timer error  
(7) 02B0: Diskette drive A error  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Debugging Port Check on Boot Mode  
Check the D port status by a debug port test. The tool for debug port test is shown below.  
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test  
The test procedures are follows;  
1. Connect the debug test cable to the connector PJ2000 of the system board. For  
disassembling to connect the test cable, refer to Chapter 4.  
2. Connect the debug port test cable and RS-232C cross-cable to the test board.  
3. Connect the RS-232C cross-cable to the PC that displays the results.  
System board  
4. Boot the computer in MS-DOS mode.  
2-20  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for  
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)  
The D port status is displayed in the following form;  
6. When the D port status is FFFFh (normal status), go to Procedure 3.  
7. When the D port status falls into any status in Table 2-4, execute Check 1.  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (1/7)  
Debug Port  
0000h  
0080h  
0081h  
0082h  
0083h  
0084h  
0085h  
0087h  
0088h  
0089h  
008Ah  
008Bh  
008Ch  
008Dh  
008Eh  
0090h  
0091h  
0094h  
0095h  
0096h  
0097h  
Description  
Initialize the chipset  
Initialize the bridge  
Initialize the CPU  
Initialize system timer  
Initialize system I/O  
Check for BIOS changing  
Go to BIOS  
Initialize Multi Processor  
Set segments to 4GB  
Initialize specific HW  
Initialize PIC and DMA  
Initialize Memory type  
Initialize Memory size  
Shadow Boot Block  
System memory test  
Initialize interrupt vectors  
Output one beep  
Initialize the boot device  
Reset segments to 64KB  
Boot BIOS change utility  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (2/7)  
Debug Port  
0098h  
Description  
Initialize USB Controller  
0101h  
0102h  
Verify Real Mode. If the CPU is in protected mode, turn on A20 and pulse the  
reset line, forcing a shutdown 0.  
0103h  
0104h  
0106h  
Disable Non-Maskable Interrupts.  
Get CPU type from CPU registers and save it.  
Initialize system hardware. Reset the DMA controllers, disable the videos, clear  
any pending interrupts from the real-time clock and set up port B register.  
0107h  
0108h  
0109h  
010Ah  
010Bh  
010Ch  
010Eh  
010Fh  
0110h  
0111h  
0112h  
0113h  
0114h  
0116h  
0117h  
0118h  
011Ah  
011Ch  
011Fh  
0120h  
0122h  
0124h  
0128h  
Disable system ROM shadow and start to execute ROM code from the flash part.  
Initialize chip set registers to the initial values.  
Set in-POST flag in CMOS that indicates we are in POST.  
Initialize CPU registers.  
Initialize cache.  
Load alternate registers with initial table values  
Restore the contents of the CPU control word whenever the CPU is reset.  
Reset PCI devices in early post  
Verify that the ROM BIOS checksums to zero  
Initialize external cache before autosizing memory.  
Initialize PIT(Programmable Interval Timer).  
Initialize DMA.  
Initialize interrupt controllers for some shutdowns.  
Verify that DRAM refresh is operating by polling the refresh bit in PORTB.  
Set segment-register addressibility to 4 GB  
Determine DRAM size and configure the chipset accordingly. Before autosizing,  
all caches and all shadow RAM are disabled.  
2-22  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (3/7)  
Debug Port  
0129h  
012Ah  
012Bh  
012Ch  
012Eh  
012Fh  
0132h  
0133h  
0134h  
0136h  
0138h  
013Ah  
013Bh  
013Ch  
Description  
Initialize the POST Memory Manager  
Zero clear the first 512K of RAM  
Test 512K base address lines  
Test the first 4MB of RAM.  
Initialize external cache before shadowing.  
Compute CPU speed.  
Initialize the Phoenix Dispatch Manager  
Test the CMOS RAM and RTC  
Vector to proper shutdown routine.  
Shadow the system BIOS.  
External cache is autosized and its configuration saved in memory.  
If CMOS is valid, load chipset registers with values from CMOS, otherwise load  
defaults.  
013Dh  
013Fh  
0141h  
0142h  
0145h  
0146h  
0148h  
Load alternate registers with CMOS values.  
Initialize interrupt vectors 0 thru 77h to the BIOS general interrupt handler.  
Initialize all motherboard devices.  
Verify the ROM copyright notice  
Verify that the equipment specified in the CMOS matches the hardware currently  
installed.  
0149h  
014Ah  
014Bh  
014Ch  
014Eh  
014Fh  
0150h  
0151h  
Initialize all PCI devices.  
Initialize video chip in system  
Shadow video BIOS ROM.  
Display copyright notice.  
Initialize MultiBoot. Allocate memory for old and new MultiBoot history tables.  
Display CPU type and speed.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
0152h  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (4/7)  
Debug Port  
0154h  
0155h  
0157h  
0158h  
0159h  
015Ah  
015Bh  
015Ch  
0160h  
0162h  
0164h  
0166h  
0167h  
0168h  
0169h  
016Ah  
016Ch  
0170h  
0172h  
Description  
Test for unexpected interrupts.  
Initialize the POST display service.  
Display prompt "Press F2 for SETUP"  
Disable L1 cache during POST  
Test RAM between 512K and 640K.  
Determine the amount of extended memory available.  
Initialize the handler for SMM.  
Display shadow message.  
Display error messages on the screen.  
Check status bits to see if configuration problems were detected. If so, Display  
error messages on the screen.  
0176h  
017Ch  
Initialize the hardware interrupt vectors from 08 to 0F and from 70h to 77H. Also  
set the interrupt vectors from 60h to 66H to zero.  
017Dh  
017Eh  
0180h  
0181h  
0182h  
0183h  
0184h  
The Coprocessor initialization test.  
Run late device initialization routines.  
Configure Fisk Disk Controller.  
2-24  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
0185h  
0186h  
Configure all PnP ISA devices.  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (5/7)  
Debug Port  
0187h  
0188h  
0189h  
018Ah  
018Bh  
018Ch  
018Fh  
0190h  
0191h  
0192h  
0193h  
0195h  
0196h  
Description  
Configure motherboard configurable devices.  
Initialize timeouts, key buffer, and soft reset flag.  
Enable non-maskable interrupts.  
Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area and initialize the mouse.  
Initialize the floppy disk and display an error message if failure was detected.  
Initialize hard-disk controller.  
Configure the local bus IDE timing register based on the drives attached to it.  
Initialize CD-ROM drive.  
Reset segment-register addressibility from 4GB to normal 64K by generating a  
Shutdown 8.  
0197h  
0198h  
0199h  
Search for option ROMs.  
Check support status for Self-Monitoring Analysis Reporting Technology (disk-  
failure warning).  
019Bh  
019Ch  
019Dh  
019Eh  
019Fh  
01A0h  
01A2h  
01A4h  
01A8h  
01AAh  
01ACh  
Perform late SMM initialization.  
Initialize Security Engine.  
Enable hardware interrupts.  
Verify that the system clock is interrupting.  
Setup Numlock indicator.  
Remove "Press F2" prompt from the screen.  
Enter SETUP.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
01AEh  
Clear CMOS flags for post.  
2-26  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (6/7)  
Debug Port  
01B0h  
Description  
Check for errors.  
01B1h  
01B2h  
Change status bits in CMOS and/or the BIOS data area to reflect the fact that  
POST is complete.  
01B3h  
01B5h  
01B6h  
01B7h  
01B9h  
01BAh  
01BCh  
01BDh  
01BEh  
01BFh  
01C1h  
01C2h  
01C3h  
01C4h  
01C5h  
01C6h  
01C7h  
01C8h  
01C9h  
01CAh  
01CBh  
01CCh  
01CDh  
01CEh  
01D1h  
01D3h  
01D4h  
Fade out logo screen.  
Initialize ACPI BIOS.  
Clear all screen graphics before booting.  
Initialize the SMBIOS header and sub-structures.  
Clear parity-error latch  
Clear the screen before booting.  
Initialize error handler  
Save the current boot type into CMOS  
Check the requested boot type  
Initializes (clears) the system error flags  
Mark the fact that we are no longer in POST  
Check (and do) if BIOS change is necessary  
Restore the memory configuration.  
Initialize BIOS stack area  
Clear memory  
Determines if the CPU supports the Extended CPUID function for Processor  
Name/Brand String.  
01D6h  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
Table 2-4 Debugging port boot mode status (7/7)  
Debug Port  
01D7h  
01D8h  
20FFh  
03B0h  
05B1h  
05B2h  
05B3h  
05B4h  
05B5h  
06BFh  
Description  
Try to boot with INT 19h.  
2-28  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and  
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.  
1. System test  
2. Memory test  
3. Keyboard test  
4. Display test  
5. Floppy Disk test  
6. Printer test  
7. Async test  
8. Hard Disk test  
9. Real Timer test  
10. NDP test  
11. Expansion test  
12. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test  
13. Wireless LAN test  
14. Sound/LAN/Modem test  
15. IEEE1394  
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
Procedure 4  
Replacement Check  
The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the  
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.  
Check 1 Visually check for the following:  
a) Cracked or broken connector housing  
b) Damaged connector pins  
If connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one  
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
2-30  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5 FDD Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.5 FDD Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the FDD is functioning properly. Perform the  
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.  
Procedure 1: FDD Head Cleaning Check  
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
FDD Head Cleaning Check  
FDD head cleaning operation details are given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.  
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run  
the test. Clean the FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the FDD still does not function  
properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.  
If the test program cannot be executed, go to Procedure 3.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.5 FDD Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to  
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.  
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-5. Make sure  
the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled. If any other  
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.  
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status  
Code  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
06h  
08h  
09h  
10h  
20h  
40h  
60h  
80h  
EEh  
FFh  
Status  
Bad command  
Address mark not found  
Write protected  
Record not found  
Media removed on dual attach card  
DMA overrun error  
DMA boundary error  
CRC error  
FDC error  
Seek error  
No FDD  
Time out error (Not ready)  
Write buffer error  
Data compare error  
Check 1 If the following message displays, release the write protect tab on the floppy disk.  
If any other message appears, perform Check 2.  
FDD-Write protected  
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.  
2-32  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5 FDD Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The 3.5inch FDD is connected to the System Board via USB port.  
Check 1 Make sure the USB cable is securely connected to the FDD. Also, make sure the  
USB cable of the FDD is securely connected to the system board.  
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2.  
If any connector is damaged, replace it with a new one and repeat Procedure 2.  
If there is still an error, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 The FDD cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the  
FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 Replace the System board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the HDD is functioning properly. Perform the  
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.  
Procedure 1: Message Check  
Procedure 2: Partition Check  
Procedure 3: Format Check  
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when you execute the HDD  
troubleshooting procedures. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy  
disks or other storage media.  
Procedure 1  
Message Check  
When the computer’s HDD does not function properly, some of the following error messages  
may appear on the display. Start with Check 1 below and perform the other checks as  
instructed.  
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 5. If the following  
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.  
HDC ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)  
or  
IDE #0 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)  
or  
IDE #1 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)  
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Procedure 2. If the following  
messages do not appear, perform Check 3.  
Insert system disk in drive  
Press any key when ready .....  
or  
Non-System disk or disk error  
Replace and press any key  
Check 3 Make sure the Hard Disk option is set to not used. If it is set to not used, choose  
another setting and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to  
Procedure 2.  
2-34  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Partition Check  
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and restart the computer with U key holding down.  
Perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Type C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you  
can change to drive C, go to Check 3.  
Check 2 Type FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the  
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed, go to Check 3. If drive C is not listed, return to  
the FDISK menu and choose the option to create a DOS partition on drive C.  
Restart the computer from the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk. If the problem still  
exists, go to Procedure 3.  
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not  
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active  
partition for drive C. Restart the computer and then go to Procedure 3.  
Check 4 Remove the FD and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to  
Procedure 3.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
Procedure 3  
Format Check  
The computer’s HDD is formatted using the low level format program and the MS-DOS  
FORMAT program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and perform the other  
steps as required.  
Check 1 Format the HDD and transfer system files using FORMAT C:/S/U. If the  
following message appears on the display, the HDD is formatted.  
Format complete  
If an error message appears on the display, refer to the Toshiba MS-DOS Manual  
for more information and perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Using the Diagnostics Disk, format the HDD with a low level format option.  
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information about the  
diagnostic program.  
If the following message appears on the display, the HDD low level format is  
complete. Partition and format the HDD using the MS-DOS FORMAT command.  
Format complete  
If you cannot format the HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to  
Procedure 4.  
2-36  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 4  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the  
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about  
the HDD test program.  
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed.  
Replace the HDD with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures. The error codes and statuses are listed in Table 2-6. If an error code is not  
generated and the problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.  
Table 2-6 Hard disk drive error code and status  
Code  
01h  
02h  
04h  
05h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
10h  
11h  
20h  
40h  
80h  
AAh  
BBh  
CCh  
E0h  
EEh  
DAh  
Status  
Bad command  
Bad address mark  
Record not found  
HDC not reset  
Drive not initialized  
HDC overrun (DRQ)  
DMA boundary error  
Bad sector error  
Bad track error  
ECC error  
ECC recover enable  
HDC error  
Seek error  
Time out error  
Drive not ready  
Undefined error  
Write fault  
Status error  
Access time out error  
No HDD  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting  
Procedure 5  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The HDD may be disconnected, or the HDD or the system board may be damaged.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to the system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still  
an error, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 The HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists, perform Check  
3.  
Check 3 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
2-38  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting  
To determine if the computer’s keyboard is functioning properly, perform the following  
procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and  
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.  
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning  
properly.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Connector and Replacement Check  
The keyboard, PAD I/F and PAD Switch may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the  
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform  
the following checks:  
1. If the keyboard malfunctions, start with Check 1.  
2. If the PAD switch malfunctions, start with Check 3.  
Check 1 Make sure the keyboard cable is securely connected to the system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still  
an error, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 The keyboard or its cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following  
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,  
perform Check 5.  
Check 3 Make sure the PAD switch cable is firmly connected to the system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If there is still  
an error, go to Check 4.  
Check 4 The PAD switch board or PAD switch cable may be damaged. Replace it with a  
new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the  
problem still exists, perform Check 5.  
Check 5 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
2-40  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.8 Display Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.8 Display Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.  
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.  
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check  
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 3: Connector and Cable Check  
Procedure 4: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
External Monitor Check  
Connect an external monitor to the computer’s external monitor port, then boot the computer.  
The computer automatically detects the external monitor.  
If the external monitor works correctly, the internal LCD may be damaged. Go to Procedure  
3.  
If the external monitor appears to have the same problem as the internal monitor, the system  
board may be damaged. Go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The Display Test program is stored on the computer’s Diagnostics disk. This program checks  
the display controller on the system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the computer’s  
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and  
Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected, go to Procedure 3.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.8 Display Troubleshooting  
Procedure 3  
Connector and Cable Check  
The LCD Module is connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. The FL inverter  
board is also connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. And the FL is connected to  
the FL inverter board by the HV cable. The connectors may be disconnected from the system  
board or the FL inverter board, or they may be damaged. Disassemble the computer  
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,  
go to Procedure 4.  
2-42  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.8 Display Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 4  
Replacement Check  
The FL, FL inverter board, LCD module, and system board are connected to display circuits.  
Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for  
instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:  
If the FL does not light, perform Check 1.  
If characters or graphics are not displayed clearly, perform Check 4.  
If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 4.  
If the FL remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 5.  
Check 1 Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,  
perform Check2.  
Check 2 The LCD/FL cable or HV cable may be defective or damaged. Replace the  
FL/LCD or HV cable with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If the problem still exists,  
perform Check3.  
Check 3 The FL inverter board may be defective or damaged. Replace the FL inverter  
board with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedure and test the display again. If the problem still exists, perform Check4.  
Check 4 The LCD module may be defective or damaged. Replace the LCD module with a  
new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test  
the display again. If the problem still exists, perform Check 5.  
Check 5 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one  
following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting  
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the Optical Drive is functioning properly. Perform  
the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as required.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.  
For the test, prepare a test CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, music CD and CD-RW Media.  
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer  
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the  
diagnostics test procedures.  
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.  
2-44  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The Optical Drive is connected to the system board. The connectors may be disconnected  
from the system board or may be damaged. Disassemble the computer following the steps  
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the Optical Drive is firmly connected to the system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still  
an error, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 The Optical Drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new  
one. If there is still an error, go to Check 3.  
Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting  
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the computer's modem is functioning properly.  
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures  
as required.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The Sound/LAN/Modem test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.  
For the test, prepare a test Sound/LAN/Modem.  
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer  
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the  
diagnostics test procedures.  
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/LAN/Modem test, go to Procedure 2.  
2-46  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The Modem is installed as a modem daughter card (MDC). If the modem malfunctions, there  
may be a bad connection between the MDC and the System Board. Or the MDC, System  
Board or their connectors might be damaged.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the MDC cable is firmly connected to the MDC and make sure the  
MDC is firmly connected to PJ3000 on the System Board.  
MDC cable  
If a connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the  
Modem is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 The MDC may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one following the  
steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the Modem is still not functioning  
properly, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the System Board with a  
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting  
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the computer's LAN is functioning properly.  
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures  
as required.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The Sound/LAN/Modem test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.  
For the test, prepare a test Sound/LAN/Modem.  
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer  
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the  
diagnostics test procedures.  
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/LAN/Modem test, go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
A RJ45 jack with LAN cable is on the System Board. If the LAN malfunctions, the System  
Board might be damaged.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures.  
2-48  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the computer's Wireless LAN is functioning  
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other  
procedures as required.  
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check  
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check  
Procedure 3: Antennas' Capability Check  
Procedure 4: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Transmitting-Receiving Check  
Make sure the wireless communication switch on the front side of the computer is turned ON.  
If it is not, slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.  
Check 1 Execute test program to check the transmitting-receiving function of the wireless  
LAN. You will need a second computer that can communicate by the wireless  
LAN. Perform the test following the instructions described in Chapter 3, Wireless  
LAN Test Program.  
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.  
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Antennas' Connection Check  
The wireless LAN wiring diagram is shown below:  
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps  
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the wireless communication switch is “On”.  
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the wireless LAN is still not functioning  
properly, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Make sure the wireless LAN board is firmly connected to PJ2200 on the system  
board.  
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and perform Procedure 1. If the  
wireless LAN board is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly  
connected to the Wireless LAN card.  
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly and  
perform Procedure 1. If the wireless LAN function is still not functioning  
properly, perform Check 3.  
Check 4 Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly  
connected from the power board to the Wireless LAN card.  
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly and  
perform Procedure 1. If the wireless LAN function is still not functioning  
properly, perform Procedure 3.  
2-50  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Antenna Check  
Check 1 Use an antenna test cable to check the antennas' connection. Follow the steps  
below:  
1. Remove the wireless LAN slot cover and lift it off. Refer to Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures, for detailed steps of disassembling.  
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables connected to the wireless LAN  
board.  
3. Connect the end of the antenna test cable to the multimeter.  
4. Connect the Main antenna cable to the antenna test cable. One clip is  
connected to the end of the white antenna cable. The other is connected to the  
opposite side of the antenna cable.  
5. Determine the resistance. The cable passes the test when the resistance is 5.  
Or less. If it is more than 5, the antenna cable fails the test.  
6. Change the antenna cable. Perform from step 3 to check the black antenna  
cable.  
Figure 2-3 Antenna Test cable  
NOTE: 1.  
The resistances determined with the steps above may not be stable with  
other machines because of "cable loss," which varies according to the  
length of the cable. The impedance of the antenna itself is about 0.5-0.8.  
2.  
The above steps cannot accurately determine the impedance of the antenna.  
Use an LC meter for a precise measure of impedance.  
If the wireless LAN antenna cables pass the test, connect them to the wireless LAN board  
and cover the slot, then perform Procedure 1.  
If the wireless LAN antenna cables do not pass the test, replace the wireless LAN antenna  
cables with new ones following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the  
wireless LAN is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 4.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.12 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
Procedure 4  
Replacement Check  
The wireless LAN board is connected to the power board and the system board. Any of these  
components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for instructions  
on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Replace the wireless LAN board with a new one following the instructions in  
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still  
exists, perform Check2.  
Check 2 The power board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one  
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still  
exists, perform Check3.  
Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures.  
2-52  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the computer's sound functions are functioning  
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other  
procedures as required.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check  
Procedure 3: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The Sound/LAN/Modem test program is stored on the computer’s diagnostic disk. Insert the  
Diagnostics disk in the computer's floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test.  
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for details.  
If an error is detected, go to Procedure 2.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check  
The sound function wiring diagram is shown below:  
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps  
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:  
If the stereo speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.  
If headphones do not work correctly, perform Check 2.  
If sound recording does not work correctly, perform Check 3.  
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not work properly, the speaker cables may be  
disconnected. Make sure the speaker cables are firmly connected to PJ6003 or  
PJ6004 on the system board. If the stereo speakers are still not functioning  
properly, go to Procedure 3.  
Check 2 If headphones do not work properly, the SD board may be disconnected or  
damaged. Make sure the connector on the SD board is firmly connected to PJ7002  
on the system board. If the sound function still does not work properly, replace it  
with a new one. Go to Procedure 3.  
Check 3 If the sound recording function does not work properly, the internal microphone  
cable or external microphone cable may be disconnected. Make sure the internal  
microphone cable is firmly connected to PJ6001 on the system board and the SD  
card is firmly connected to PJ7002 on the system board. If recording is still not  
functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.  
2-54  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.13 Sound Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Replacement Check  
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not sound properly, they may be defective or damaged.  
Replace them with new ones. If the stereo speakers still do not work properly, go  
to Check 5.  
Check 2 If headphones does sound properly, the headphone jack may be defective or  
damaged. Replace the SD board with a new one. If the headphone still does not  
work properly, go to Check 5.  
Check 3 If the recording function does not work properly by the external microphone, the  
external microphone jack may be defective or damaged. Replace the SD board  
with a new one. If the recording function still does not work properly, go to Check  
5.  
Check 4 If the recording function does not work properly by the internal microphone, the  
internal microphone may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If  
the recording function still does not work properly, go to Check 5.  
Check 5 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a  
new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.14 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting  
2.14 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting  
To check if the SD card/Smart Media slot is good or no good, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Check on Windows  
Procedure 2: Connector/Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Check on Windows  
Insert an SD card into the slot. Check if Windows recognizes automatically the SD card and  
the data in the SD card can be read.  
If the card is not recognized or data are not red, go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector/Replacement Check  
The SD card is connected to IS2101 on the system board.  
Check 1 The SD card and the system board may be disconnected. Make sure the SD card is  
firmly inserted to IS2101 on the system board. If not, insert it firmly. If the SD  
card is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 The SD card may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in  
Chapter 4. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in  
Chapter 4.  
2-56  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.14 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Tests and Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3-ii  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Chapter 3  
Contents  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1  
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-3  
Subtest Names............................................................................................................ 3-7  
System Test................................................................................................................ 3-9  
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-12  
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-13  
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-16  
Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-19  
Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-21  
3.10 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-23  
3.11 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-24  
3.12 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-27  
3.13 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-29  
3.14 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-30  
3.15 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-31  
3.16 LAN Test ................................................................................................................. 3-32  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names ........................................................................ 3-33  
3.18 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-36  
3.19 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-38  
3.19.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-38  
3.19.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-38  
3.20 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-39  
3.20.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-39  
3.20.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-40  
3.21 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-41  
3.21.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-41  
3.21.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-41  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-42  
3.22.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-42  
3.22.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-43  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.23 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-47  
3.23.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-47  
3.23.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-48  
3.24 Wireless LAN Test Program (Calexico).................................................................. 3-49  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)........................................ 3-50  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program.......................................................................... 3-53  
3.27 IEEE1394 Test Program .......................................................................................... 3-57  
Tables  
Table 3-1  
Table 3-2  
Table 3-3  
Table 3-4  
Subtest names................................................................................................. 3-7  
Error codes and error status names.............................................................. 3-33  
Hard disk controller status register contents................................................ 3-36  
Error register contents.................................................................................. 3-37  
3-iv  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.1 The Diagnostic Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3
3.1 The Diagnostic Test  
This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test program to test the functions of the  
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostic Test Program is stored on the Diagnostic  
Disk. The Diagnostic Test program consists of eight programs that are grouped into the  
Service Program Module (DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU).  
NOTES: To start the diagnostics, follow these steps:  
1. Check all cables for loose connections.  
2. Exit any application you may be using and close Windows.  
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following six functions.  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
HEAD CLEANING  
LOG UTILITIES  
RUNNING TEST  
FDD UTILITIES  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
EXIT TO MS-DOS  
The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following thirteen functional tests:  
SYSTEM TEST  
MEMORY TEST  
KEYBOARD TEST  
DISPLAY TEST  
FLOPPY DISK TEST  
PRINTER TEST  
ASYNC TEST  
HARD DISK TEST  
REAL TIMER TEST  
NDP TEST  
EXPANSION TEST  
CD-ROM/DVD TEST  
LAN TEST  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.1 The Diagnostic Test  
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.  
The Diagnostics Disk (all tests)  
A formatted working disk for the floppy disk drive test  
An external FDD attachment  
A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)  
A cleaning kit to clean the DVD-ROM drive heads (Head Cleaning)  
A PC card wraparound connector for the I/O card test (Expansion test)  
A printer wraparound connector for the printer wraparound test (Printer test)  
A CD test media (TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK (ZA1217P01/P000204190) and  
music CD) (CD-ROM test)  
A DVD test media (Toshiba-EMI DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1)  
External CRT (Display test)  
PS/2 or compatible keyboard (Keyboard test)  
PS/2 or compatible mouse (Keyboard test)  
Headphone (Sound test)  
CD-ROM drive (CD-ROM test)  
A microphone  
A modular cable and RJ11 connector checker  
A modular cable and RJ11 connector checker (LED)  
USB test module and USB cable  
LAN wraparound connector  
Music CD (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)  
The following sections detail the tests within the Diagnostic Test function of the  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Refer to Sections 3.17 through 3.27 for detailed information  
on the remaining Service Program Module functions.  
3-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
Toshiba MS-DOS is required to run the DIAGNOSTICS TEST PROGRAM. To start the  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM, follow these steps:  
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the floppy disk drive and turn on the computer while  
pressing F key.  
(The Diagnostics Disk contains the MS-DOS boot files.)  
NOTE: To execute the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM test, make sure the CD-ROM and CD-  
ROM drive or DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM drive is installed in the computer.  
The following menu will appear:  
NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is  
in progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program, or press Ctrl + C to  
stop the test program.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
2. To execute the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU, set  
the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU  
will appear:  
TOSHIBA Personal Computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS  
Version X.XX (C) Copyright TOSHIBA Corp. XXXX  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :  
1 - SYSTEM TEST  
2 - MEMORY TEST  
3 - KEYBOARD TEST  
4 - DISPLAY TEST  
5 - FLOPPY DISK TEST  
6 - PRINTER TEST  
7 – ASYNC TEST  
8 - HARD DISK TEST  
9 - REAL TIMER TEST  
10 - NDP TEST  
11 - EXPANSION TEST  
12 -  
13 – CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST  
14 – LAN TEST  
88 - ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]  
99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU  
↑↓→← : Select items  
Enter : Specify  
Esc  
: Exit  
Refer to sections 3.4 through 3.16 for detailed descriptions of each Diagnostic Tests 1  
through 14. Function 88 sets the floppy disk drive and hard disk drive error retry  
count (0-255). To return to the Diagnostics Menu, set the highlight bar to Function 99  
and press Enter.  
3-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3. Select the test you want to execute and press Enter. When SYSTEM TEST is  
selected, the following message will appear:  
SYSTEM TEST  
XXXXXXX  
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX  
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end  
[Ctrl]+[C]  
: key stop  
SUB-TEST : XX  
PASS COUNT : XXXXX  
WRITE DATA : XX  
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX  
READ DATA : XX  
: XXX  
ADDRESS : XXXXXXSTATUS  
SUB-TEST MENU :  
01 - ROM checksum  
02 –  
03 -  
04 - Fan ON/OFF  
05 – Geyserville  
06 - Quick charge  
07 - DMI read  
08 - DMI write  
09 -  
10 – CPU Temperature  
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU  
↑↓→: Select items  
Enter  
Esc  
: Specify  
: Exit  
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one  
shown above.  
4. Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The  
following message will appear:  
TEST LOOP : YES/NO  
Selecting YES increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle ends and  
restarts the test cycle.  
Selecting NO returns to the subtest menu after the test is complete.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
5. The following message will appear:  
ERROR STOP : YES/NO  
Selecting YES stops the test program when an error is found and displays the  
operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:  
ERROR STATUS NAME [[ HALT OPERATION ]]  
1: Test end  
2: Continue  
3: Retry  
These three selections have the following functions respectively:  
[1] Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.  
[2] Continues the test.  
[3] Restarts the test from the error.  
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found.  
6. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.  
Table 3-1 in section 3.3 describes the function of each test on the subtest menu. Table  
3-2 in section 3.17 describes the error codes and error status for each error.  
3-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Subtest Names  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.3 Subtest Names  
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.  
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)  
No.  
Test Name  
SYSTEM  
Subtest No.  
Subtest Name  
ROM checksum  
1
01  
04  
Fan ON/OFF  
05  
06  
07  
08  
10  
Geyserville  
Quick charge  
DMI read  
DMI write  
CPU Temperature  
Conventional memory  
Protected Mode  
Cache memory  
L2 Cache memory  
Stress  
2
3
MEMORY  
01  
02  
04  
05  
06  
KEYBOARD  
01  
02  
04  
05  
06  
07  
Pressed key display  
Pressed key code display  
Touch Pad  
USB (Port 0, Port 1) test  
USB (Port 2) test  
Button test  
4
DISPLAY  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
VRAM read/write for VGA  
Gradation for VGA  
Gradation for LCD  
Gradation & Mode test for VGA  
All dot on/off for LCD  
“H” pattern display  
LCD Brightness  
5
FLOPPY DISK  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Sequential read  
Sequential read/write  
Random address/data  
Write specified address  
Read specified address  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.3 Subtest Names  
Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)  
No.  
Test Name  
PRINTER  
Subtest No.  
Subtest Name  
6
01  
02  
03  
06  
07  
Ripple pattern  
Function  
Wrap around  
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)  
7
8
ASYNC  
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)  
HARD DISK  
01  
02  
03  
04  
06  
07  
09  
10  
Sequential read  
Address uniqueness  
Random address/data  
Cross talk & peak shift  
Write specified address  
Read specified address  
Sequential write  
W-R-C specified address  
9
REAL TIMER  
01  
02  
03  
Real time  
Backup memory  
Real time carry  
10  
11  
NDP  
01  
NDP test  
EXPANSION  
01  
03  
PCMCIA wrap around  
RGB monitor ID  
13  
CD-ROM/DVD-  
ROM  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Sequential read  
Read specified address  
Random address/data  
Playback music  
RW 1Point W/R/C  
14  
LAN  
01  
LAN MAC ADDRESS DISPLAY  
3-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 System Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.4 System Test  
To execute the System Test select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute  
and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
ROM Checksum  
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to  
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.  
Subtest 04  
Fan ON/OFF  
This subtest turns on/off the fan motor by force with Fan ON/OFF commands.  
The following message will appear. Make sure the fan does not rotate and  
press Enter.  
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start  
The following message will appear. Make sure the fan rotates at low speed  
and press Enter.  
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start  
The following message will appear. Make sure the fan rotates at high speed  
and press Enter.  
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start  
Subtest 05  
Subtest 06  
Geyserville  
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this Subtest checks that the CPU  
operating clock speed can be changed.  
Quick Charge  
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.4 System Test  
Subtest 07  
DMI read  
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following  
format.  
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***  
Model Name  
: XXXXXXXXXXX  
Version Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX  
Serial Number : XXXXXXXX  
Model Number  
PCN/BND Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXX  
UUID Number : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXX-XXXXX  
Press [Enter] to EXIT  
To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.  
Subtest 08  
DMI write  
The following messages appear in order. Input each information. (If you do  
not replace the PCB, the DMI information should not be changed.)  
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed.  
Input the computer’s model name and press Enter. (e.g. DynaBook)  
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed.  
Input the computer’s version number and press Enter. (e.g.  
PC18070C313S)  
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed.  
Input the computer’s serial number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)  
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed.  
Input the computer’s sales model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-  
AAAAA)  
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed.  
Input the computer’s PCN/Bundle number and press Enter. (e.g.  
PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)  
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed.  
To write the DMI information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.  
3-10  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 System Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed.  
Press Y, then the DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy  
disk, etc.  
Subtest 10  
CPU Temperature  
This subtest checks the CPU temperature.  
When the subtest starts, the following message appears on the display. Enter  
the ambient Celsius temperature.  
EXT. TEMP =  
When the temperature is entered, test program turns off the screen message.  
After 15 minutes, it measures the CPU temperature and judges the test result  
(OK or NG) based on the gap between the ambient temperature and the  
measured temperature (threshold value).  
When any error occurs, an error log is written into “DIAGNOSTIC MENU: 5-  
LOG UTILITIES”.  
The meaning of “WD” or “RD” of the error log is as follows:  
WD : Reference value of CPU temperature rising (hexadecimal form).  
RD : Gap between the CPU temperature and the ambient temperature  
(hexadecimal form).  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.5 Memory Test  
3.5 Memory Test  
To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Conventional memory  
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB),  
then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.  
Subtest 02  
Protected Mode  
NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager  
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the  
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.  
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum  
MB), and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.  
Subtest 04  
Cache Memory  
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’  
data is run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’:’Program’ size to ‘7000’:’7FFF’  
(32 KB)) to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache memory.  
One test takes 3 seconds.  
Number of misses < Number of hits OK  
Number of misses Number of hits Fail  
Subtest 05  
Subtest 06  
L2 Cache Memory  
To test the L2 cache memory, a similar test to that for the cache memory is  
performed.  
Stress  
Data (from 1MB to the maximum MB) is written from the 16KB write buffer  
to the 16KB read buffer and compared the data in the buffers. The read buffer  
starts from 0001 and the comparison is continued with the following read  
buffer addresses: 0001, 0003, 0005, 0007, 0009, 000b, 000d and 000f.  
3-12  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Keyboard Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.6 Keyboard Test  
To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Pressed key display  
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as  
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen  
changes to the key character that was pressed. Holding a key down enables  
the auto-repeat function which causes the key’s display character to blink.  
Press Del + Enter to end the test.  
Subtest 02  
Pressed key code display  
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are  
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps  
Lock, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift, and Right Shift  
keys are displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes,  
character codes, and key top names are shown in Appendix D.  
KEYBOARD TEST IN PROGRESS 302000  
Scan code  
Character code =  
Keytop  
Ins Lock Caps Lock Num Lock  
Alt Ctrl Left Shift Right Shift  
PRESS [Enter] KEY  
=
=
Scroll Lock  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.6 Keyboard Test  
Subtest 04  
Touch Pad  
This subtest checks the functions of the touch pad as shown below.  
A) Direction and parameter  
B) Switching function check.  
This test displays the response from the touch pad and touch pad switch.  
When moving your finger on the touch pad towards the upper left, the  
<POINTING>display changes according to the following illustration. If a  
touch pad switch is pressed, the <BUTTONS>displays appear on the right  
side one by one. The parameters appear above the <BUTTONS> (1) or (2)  
corresponding to the pressed touch pad switch highlights. If two touch pad  
switches are pressed at the same time, the subtest menu appears.  
*** IPS (PAD) TEST PROGRAM  
<POINTING>  
(Vx.xx) ***  
STATUS :0000h  
■■  
■■■■  
■■■■■■  
■■■■■■  
■■■■  
X-RATE :0000h  
Y-RATE :0000h  
<BUTTON>  
(1)  
(2)  
■■  
 
<<Press BUTTON1 + BUTTON2 THEN END>>  
*** IPS (PAD) TEST PROGRAM (Vx.xx) ***  
< POINTING >  
< PARAMETER >  
STATUS : 0018h  
X-RATE : OK  
Y-RATE : OK  
<BUTTON>  
(1) (2)  
<<PRESS BUTTON1 + BUTTON2 THEN END>>  
3-14  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Keyboard Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Subtest 05  
Subtest 06  
Subtest 07  
USB (Port 0, Port1) test  
This subtest checks USB. The USB TEST Module (ZD0003P01) and USB  
Cable (ZD0003P02) must be connected to the computer.  
The following message will appear. Select a port to test and press Enter.  
Test port number select (1:Port0, 2:Port1, 0:Port0&1) ?  
If the test ends successfully, OK is displayed. If there is a problem with the  
USB port, an error message appears. Check the wraparound connection and  
repeat the test.  
USB (Port 2) test  
This subtest checks USB. The USB TEST Module (ZD0003P01) and USB  
Cable (ZD0003P02) must be connected to the computer.  
The following message will appear. Select a port to test and press Enter.  
Test port number select (1:Port2, 2:Port3, 0:Port2&3) ?  
If the test ends successfully, OK is displayed. If there is a problem with the  
USB port, an error message appears. Check the wraparound connection and  
repeat the test.  
Button test  
This subtest checks the IE, Mail and TV button.  
1. The following message is displayed. Press IE button.  
Press [IE] Button  
2. The following message is displayed. Press Mail button.  
Press [Mail] Button  
3. The message is displayed. Press TV button.  
Press [TV] Button  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.7 Display Test  
3.7 Display Test  
To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
VRAM read/write for VGA  
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The  
data is read and compared to the original data.  
Subtest 02  
Gradation for VGA  
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right  
across the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below  
appears on the screen, when this subtest is executed.  
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.  
Subtest 03  
Gradation for LCD  
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green,  
and blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green,  
semi-green, blue, semi-blue, white, and semi-white. Each color displays for  
three seconds.  
3-16  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.7 Display Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Subtest 04  
Gradation & Mode test for VGA  
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode,  
press Enter.  
[Mode 12]  
[Mode 13]  
[Mode 3]  
[Mode 111 640*480 64K]  
[Mode 112 640*480 16M]  
[Mode 114 800*600 64K]  
[Mode 115 800*600 16M]  
[Mode 117 1024*768 64K]  
[Mode 118 1024×768 16M]  
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.  
(Display example: Mode 12)  
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after  
displaying the Mode 118.  
Subtest 05  
All dot on/off for LCD  
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display  
changes automatically every three seconds, then returns to the DISPLAY  
TEST menu.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.7 Display Test  
Subtest 06  
“H” Pattern Display  
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.  
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on  
error.  
Subtest 07  
LCD Brightness  
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:  
Super-Bright —> Bright —> Semi-Bright —> Bright —> Super-Bright  
3-18  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Floppy Disk Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.8 Floppy Disk Test  
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove  
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD. The contents of  
the floppy disk will be erased.  
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press  
Enter and follow the directions displayed on the screen. After selecting the Floppy Disk Test  
from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, messages to execute the test drive number, media  
type and test start truck will be displayed successively. Answer each question with an  
appropriate response to execute the test.  
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested,  
then press Enter.  
Media in drive#1 mode (0:2DD, 1:2D, 2:2D-2HD/2DD, 3:2HD) ?  
Test start track  
(Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?  
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.  
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.  
FLOPPY DISK  
XXXXXXX  
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX  
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end  
[Ctrl]+[C]  
: key stop  
SUB-TEST : XX  
PASS COUNT : XXXXX  
WRITE DATA : XX  
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX  
READ DATA  
: XX  
: XXX  
ADDRESS  
: XXXXXXSTATUS  
SUB-TEST MENU :  
01 - Sequential read  
02 - Sequential read/write  
03 - Random address/data  
04 - Write specified address  
05 - Read specified address  
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.8 Floppy Disk Test  
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following  
message will appear during the floppy disk test.  
xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX  
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end  
FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS XXXXXXX  
[Ctrl]+[C]  
: key stop  
SUB-TEST : XX  
PASS COUNT : XXXXX  
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX  
READ DATA : XX  
: XXXXXX STATUS : XXX  
WRITE DATA : XX  
ADDRESS  
3. When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen.  
Select the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.  
Test data  
Track No.  
Head No.  
?? (subtest 04 only)  
??  
?
Subtest 01  
Sequential read  
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously  
reads all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.  
Subtest 02  
Sequential read/write  
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks  
(track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared  
to the original data.  
Subtest 03  
Random address/data  
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to  
39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the  
original data.  
Subtest 04  
Subtest 05  
Write specified address  
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head,  
and address.  
Read specified address  
This subtest reads data from a track, head, and address specified by an  
operator.  
3-20  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9 Printer Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.9 Printer Test  
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The following messages will appear after selecting the  
Printer Test from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Answer each of the questions with an  
appropriate response to execute the test.  
NOTE: A Port Replicator and an IBM compatible printer must be connected to the  
system to execute this test.  
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:  
channel#1 = XXXXh  
channel#2 = XXXXh  
channel#3 = XXXXh  
Select the channel number (1-3) ?  
The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports  
three printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the  
selected subtest.  
Subtest 01  
Ripple Pattern  
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while  
shifting one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.9 Printer Test  
Subtest 02  
Function  
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:  
Normal print  
Double-width print  
Compressed print  
Emphasized print  
Double-strike print  
All characters print  
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:  
Subtest 03  
Wraparound  
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the  
computer’s printer port. The connector wiring diagram is described in Appendix  
F.  
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control  
and status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector  
(34M741986G01). (Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)  
3-22  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Async Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.10 Async Test  
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and  
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want  
to execute and press Enter.  
Subtests 06 and 07 require the following data format:  
Method:  
Speed:  
Data:  
Asynchronous  
38400BPS  
8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)  
Data pattern: 20h to 7Eh  
Subtest 06  
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)  
NOTE: To execute subtests 06 and 07, each computer must have access to the other  
computer’s infrared port.  
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the  
sent data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.  
Subtest 07  
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)  
This subtest is used with subtest 06 described above. This subtest receives the  
data from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR  
port.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.11 Hard Disk Test  
3.11 Hard Disk Test  
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter,  
and follow the directions on the screen.  
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 01, 02, 03, 04, 06,  
07,09, or 10 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should  
transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard disk. If  
the customer has not or cannot perform the back-up, create back-up disks as  
described below.  
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still  
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it  
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup  
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the  
user’s files.  
Refer to the operating system instructions.  
The following messages will appear after selecting the hard disk test from the DIAGNOSTIC  
TEST MENU.  
Test drive number select  
HDC F/W error retry  
(1:HDD#1, 2:HDD#2, 0:HDD#1&2) ?  
(1:yes, 2:no) ?  
↑↓→←: Select items, Enter : Specify, Esc : Exit  
1. This message is used to select the error dump operation when a data compare error is  
detected. Select yes or no.  
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)  
2. This message is used to select whether or not the HDD status is displayed on the  
screen. The HDD status is described in section 3.18. Select yes or no.  
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes)  
3-24  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11 Hard Disk Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status  
prompt. Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The  
following message will appear during each subtest.  
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX  
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end  
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX  
[Ctrl]+[C]  
: key stop  
SUB TEST  
: XX  
PASS COUNT : XXXXX  
WRITE DATA : XX  
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX  
READ DATA  
STATUS  
: XX  
: XXX  
ADDRESS  
: XXXXXX  
The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the  
fourth digit indicates the head and the last two digits indicate the sector.  
The first digit of the STATUS number indicates the drive being tested and the last  
two digits indicate the error status code as explained in table 3-2 of the section 3.17.  
Subtest 01  
Sequential read  
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at  
track 0. When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the  
maximum track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.  
Subtest 02  
Address uniqueness  
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-  
track. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the  
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:  
1. Forward sequential  
2. Reverse sequential  
3. Random  
Subtest 03  
Random address/data  
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This  
data is then read and compared to the original data.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.11 Hard Disk Test  
Subtest 04  
Cross talk & peak shift  
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a  
cylinder, then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder. (Test the  
data interference in the neighbor track)  
Worst pattern data  
Cylinder  
‘B5ADAD’  
‘4A5252’  
‘EB6DB6’  
‘149249’  
’63B63B’  
‘9C49C4’  
‘2DB6DB’  
‘D24924’  
0 cylinder  
1 cylinder  
2 cylinder  
3 cylinder  
4 cylinder  
5 cylinder  
6 cylinder  
7 cylinder  
Subtest 06  
Subtest 07  
Write specified address  
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the  
HDD.  
Read specified address  
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and  
head on the HDD.  
Subtest 09  
Subtest 10  
Sequential write  
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.  
W-R-C specified address  
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then  
reads the data and compares it to the original data.  
3-26  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12 Real Timer Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3
3.12 Real Timer Test  
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Real time  
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time  
subtest follow these steps:  
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:  
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX  
Current time : XX:XX:XX  
Enter new date:  
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST  
2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new  
date” prompt and press Enter.  
3. The following messages will appear:  
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX  
Current time : XX:XX:XX  
Enter new time:  
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST  
4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format.  
To enter ":", press Shift + ;. The time is updated.  
To exit, press Enter.  
Subtest 02  
Backup memory  
This subtest checks the following backup memories:  
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh  
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh  
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh  
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.12 Real Timer Test  
Subtest 03  
Real time carry  
CAUTION: When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.  
This subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and  
time are displayed in the following format:  
Current date : 12-31-1999  
Current time : 23:59:58  
The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is  
displayed:  
Current date : 01-01-2000  
Current time : 00:00:00  
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST  
Press Enter to exit.  
3-28  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.13 NDP Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.13 NDP Test  
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen.  
Subtest 01  
NDP  
This test checks the following functions of NDP:  
Control word  
Status word  
Bus  
Addition  
Multiplication  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.14 Expansion Test  
3.14 Expansion Test  
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen.  
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.  
Subtest 01  
PCMCIA wrap around  
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:  
Address line  
REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line  
Data line  
Speaker line  
Wait line  
BSY#, BVD1 line  
This subtest is executed in the following order:  
Sub#  
Address  
Good  
Bad  
Contents  
Address line  
REG#, CE#1, CE#2  
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00  
01  
00001  
00001  
nn  
nn  
xx  
xx  
02  
00002  
ww  
rr  
Data line  
ww=write data, rr=read  
data  
03  
04  
05  
00003  
00004  
00005  
––  
40,80  
nn  
––  
xx  
xx  
Speaker line  
Wait line (40<xx<80)  
Other lines (BSY#, BVD1)  
NN=21, 00  
NOTE: Select the subtest number01, The following message will appear:  
Test slot number select (1:slot0, 2:slot1, 0:slot0&1)?  
Subtest 03  
RGB monitor ID  
Connect a wraparound connector to CRT monitor for the test of ID acquisition.  
This subtest is executed by using VESA command.  
3-30  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.15 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.15 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test  
To execute the CD-ROM/DVD test, select 13 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press  
Enter and follow the directions on the screen.  
NOTE: For the subtest 01, 02 and 03, use the TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK  
(ZA1217P01/P000204190) for CD-ROM and DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1 for  
DVD-ROM. For the subtest 04, use a music CD on the market. For the subtest 05,  
use a CD-RW on the market.  
Subtest 01  
Sequential read  
This subtest is a sequential reading of one-block units (2K bytes) of all the  
logical addresses.  
Subtest 02  
Subtest 03  
Read specified address  
This subtest reads one-block data from a specified address.  
Random address/data  
This subtest reads one-block data and multi-block data from random addresses  
200 times.  
Subtest 04  
Playback Music (CD only)  
This subtest reads track data from a specified track and plays the sound.  
CAUTION: When the CD-ROM test is executed, “ALL DEVICE” must be selected in the  
“SET-UP” of the BIOS SETUP. If the “ALL DEVICE” is not selected, music  
can not be played.  
Subtest 05  
RW 1Point W/R/C  
This subtest writes, reads and compares data at one point on a CD/RW media.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.16 LAN test  
3.16 LAN test  
To execute the LAN test, select 14 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The LAN test contains one subtest.  
Subtest 01  
LAN MAC ADDRESS DISPLAY  
This subtest reads MAC ADDRESS and displays it.  
Press Enter to exit.  
3-32  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names  
Table 3-2 lists the error codes and error status names for the Diagnostic Test.  
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/3)  
Device name  
(Common)  
Error code  
Error status name  
Data Compare Error  
FF  
01  
02  
03  
ROM Checksum Error  
Location ID Error  
Serial ID Write Error  
System  
01  
02  
14  
DD  
DE  
DF  
Parity Error  
Memory  
Protected Mode Not Changed  
Memory Read/Write Error  
Cache Memory Error  
2nd Cache Error  
TAG-RAM Error  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
Mouse Interface Error  
IPS Interface Error  
Interface Error  
Retransmit Error  
Mouse Handler Not Support  
PS/2 Mouse & IPS Not Support  
Keyboard  
01  
02  
03  
04  
06  
08  
09  
10  
20  
40  
60  
80  
EE  
Bad Command Error  
Address Mark Not Found  
Write Protected  
Record Not Found  
Media Removed  
DMA Overrun Error  
DMA Boundary Error  
CRC Error  
FDC Error  
Seek Error  
Not Drive Error  
Time Out Error  
FDD  
Write Buffer Error  
01  
08  
10  
20  
40  
80  
Time Out  
Fault  
Select Line  
Out Of Paper  
Power Off  
Busy Line  
Printer  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names  
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/3)  
Device name  
ASYNC  
Error code  
Error status name  
01  
02  
04  
08  
10  
20  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
DSR On Time Out  
CTS On Time Out  
RX-READY Time Out  
TX-FULL Time Out  
Parity Error  
Framing Error  
Overrun Error  
Underrun error  
Timer time out error  
CRC error  
Line Status Error  
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
10  
11  
20  
40  
80  
AA  
BB  
CC  
E0  
EE  
DA  
Bad Command Error  
Address Mark Not Found  
Record Not Found  
HDC Not Reset Error  
Drive Not Initialized  
HDC Overrun (DRQ)  
DMA Boundary Error  
Bad Sector  
Bad Track Error  
ECC Error  
ECC Recover Enable  
HDC Error  
Seek Error  
Time Out Error  
Drive Not Ready  
Undefined Error  
Write Fault  
HDD  
Status Error  
Access Time Out Error  
No HDD  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
No Co-Processor  
Control Word Error  
Status Word Error  
Bus Error  
Addition Error  
Multiply Error  
NDP  
3-34  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.17 Error Code and Error Status Names  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (3/3)  
Device name  
Expansion  
Error code  
Error status name  
Address Line Error  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
CB  
CD  
REG# Line Error  
CE#1 Line Error  
CE#2 Line Error  
DATA Line Error  
WAIT Line Error  
BSY# Line Error  
BVD1 Line Error  
ZV Port Error  
No PCMCIA  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
09  
11  
20  
40  
80  
90  
B0  
Bad Command  
Illegal Length  
Unit Attention  
Media Change Request  
Media Detected  
Additional Sense  
Boundary Error  
Corrected Data Error  
Drive Not Ready  
Seek Error  
CD/DVD-ROM  
Time Out  
Reset Error  
Address Error  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.18 Hard Disk Test Detail Status  
3.18 Hard Disk Test Detail Status  
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:  
HDC status = XXXXXXXX  
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-digit  
number. The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status number and  
the last four digits are not used.  
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the  
contents of the HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the  
HDC error register.  
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-3 and 3-4.  
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
7
BSY  
(Busy)  
“0” … HDC is ready.  
“1” … HDC is busy.  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRY  
(Drive ready)  
“0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.  
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.  
DWF  
(Drive write fault)  
“0” … DWF error is not detected.  
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.  
DSC  
“0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.  
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.  
(Drive seek complete)  
DRQ  
(Data request)  
“0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.  
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.  
COR  
(Corrected data)  
“0” … Not used  
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.  
IDX  
(Index)  
“0” … Not used  
“1” … Index is sensed.  
ERR  
“0” … Normal  
(Error)  
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.  
3-36  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.18 Hard Disk Test Detail Status  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Table 3-4 Error register contents  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
7
BBK  
“0” … Not used  
(Bad block mark)  
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.  
6
UNC  
“0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.  
(Uncorrectable)  
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.  
5
4
——  
Not used  
IDN  
“0” … Not used  
(Identification)  
“1” … There is no ID field in the requested sector.  
3
2
——  
Not used  
ABT  
“0” … Not used  
(Abort)  
“1” … Illegal command error or command abort.  
1
TK0  
(Track 0)  
“0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate  
command.  
“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a  
recalibrate command.  
0
——  
Not used  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.19 Head Cleaning  
3.19 Head Cleaning  
3.19.1 Function Description  
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read  
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.  
3.19.2 Operations  
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the  
following messages:  
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX  
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).  
Press any key when ready.  
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press  
Enter.  
3. When the cleaning startmessage appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.  
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is  
completed.  
3-38  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.20 Log Utilities  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.20 Log Utilities  
3.20.1 Function Description  
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results  
in RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk or output the data to a printer.  
The error information is displayed in the following order:  
1. Error count (CNT)  
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)  
3. Pass count (PASS)  
4. Error status (STS)  
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)  
6. Write data (WD)  
7. Read data (RD)  
8. HDC status (HSTS)  
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)  
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.20 Log Utilities  
3.20.2 Operations  
1. Selecting 5 and pressing Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, logs error information  
into RAM or onto a floppy disk. The error information is displayed in the following  
format:  
XXXXX ERRORS  
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR WDRDHSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]  
001 FDD 02 0000 103 00001 00000000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED  
001 FDD 01 0000 180 00001 00000000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR  
Address  
Error status  
HDC status  
Pass count  
Read data  
Subtest number  
Error status name  
Write data  
Test name  
Error count  
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]  
2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following  
number keys:  
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.  
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.  
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.  
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.  
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.  
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.  
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.  
3. In the case of “error retry OK,” a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the  
error status. However, it is not added to the error count.  
3-40  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.21 Running Test  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.21 Running Test  
3.21.1 Function Description  
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:  
1. System test (subtest 01)  
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02 and 04)  
3. Display test (subtest 01)  
4. FDD test (subtest 02)  
5. HDD test (subtests 01 and 05)  
6. Real timer test (subtest 02)  
7. Printer test (subtest 03) if selected  
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer  
for the FDD test.  
3.21.2 Operations  
CAUTION: Do not forget to load a work disk in the FDD. If a work disk is not loaded, an  
error will be generated during the FDD testing.  
1. Remove the diagnostics disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the formatted work  
disk.  
2. Select 6 from the Diagnostic Menu and press Enter, the following message displays:  
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?  
Selecting Y (yes) executes the printer wraparound test. A printer wraparound  
connector must be connected to the parallel port of the computer to properly execute  
this test.  
3. Select Y or N and press Enter. The following message will appear:  
Serial #A wrap around test (Y/N) ?  
Selecting Y (yes) executes the ASYNC wraparound test. An RS-232-C wraparound  
connector must be connected to the serial port of the computer to properly execute this  
test.  
4. Select Y or N and press Enter.  
5. This program is executed continuously. To terminate the program, press Ctrl +  
Break.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
3.22.1 Function Description  
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the  
FDD and HDD.  
1. FORMAT  
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. The option is different from  
the Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.  
This program can format a 3.5-inch floppy disk in the following formats:  
(a) 2D: Double-sided, double-density, 48/67.5 TPI, MFM mode, 512 bytes, 9  
sectors/track.  
(b) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode,  
512 bytes, 9 sectors/track.  
(c) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512  
bytes, 18 sectors/track.  
2. COPY  
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.  
3. DUMP  
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of  
the hard disk on the display.  
4. HDD ID READ  
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays the hard disk ID, serial number and  
other hard disk information.  
3-42  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.22.2 Operations  
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the  
following message:  
[ FDD UTILITIES ]  
1 - FORMAT  
2 - COPY  
3 - DUMP  
4 – HDD-ID READ  
9 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU  
2. FORMAT program  
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message:  
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX  
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?  
(b) Select a drive number to display the following message:  
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?  
(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the  
one below will be displayed:  
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.  
Insert work disk into drive A:  
Press any key when ready.  
(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press  
any key.  
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed:  
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX  
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X  
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX  
Format start  
[[track, head = XXX X]]  
After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear:  
Format complete  
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?  
(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test  
to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
3. COPY program  
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears:  
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX  
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?  
(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one  
below:  
Insert source disk into drive A:  
Press any key when ready.  
(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press  
any key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has  
started.  
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK  
= XXX  
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X  
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX  
Copy start  
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]  
(d) The following message will appear.  
Insert target disk into drive A:  
Press any key when ready.  
(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and  
press any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the  
target disk.  
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]  
(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the  
message from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been  
copied, the following message will appear:  
Copy complete  
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?  
(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.  
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.  
3-44  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
4. DUMP program  
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears:  
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX  
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?  
(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDDis selected, the display will go to step (h). If  
1:FDDis selected, the following message will appear:  
Select drive number (1:A, 2:B) ?  
(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.  
Format type select (1:2DD, 3:2HD) ?  
(d) If 3:2HDis selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.  
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?  
(e) The following message will appear:  
Insert source disk into drive A:  
Press any key when ready.  
(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear:  
—— Max. address ——  
[Track ] = XXXX  
[Head ] = XX  
[Sector] = XX  
Track number ????  
(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The  
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k)  
will appear.  
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDDin (a).  
Select drive number (1:C, 2:D) ?  
(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.  
---Max. address ---  
[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX  
LBA number ????????  
(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and  
dump a list.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.22 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities  
(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.  
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?  
(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD  
UTILITIES MENU.  
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?  
5. HDD ID READ program  
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration:  
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #X]  
ID code (h)  
= XXXX  
No. of Cylinders  
Removable Cylinders  
No. of Heads  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
Unformat Bytes/Track  
Unformat Bytes/Sector = XXXX XXXX  
Sectors/Track  
Gap Length  
Sync. Bytes  
Reserved (h)  
Serial No.  
Controller Type (h)  
Sector Buffers  
ECC Bytes  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX  
= YYY...  
= XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= XXXX XXXX  
= YYYYYY..  
= YYYY...  
= XXXX  
Firmware Rev.  
Model No.  
Reserved (h)  
Double Word Capability = XXXX XXXX  
Press [Enter] key  
Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.  
3-46  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.23 System Configuration  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3
3.23 System Configuration  
3.23.1 Function Description  
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the  
computer:  
1. Processor Type  
2. VGA Controller  
3. MS-DOS Version  
4. BIOS ROM version (1st ID, 2nd ID)  
5. Boot ROM version  
6. KBC version  
7. PS Microprocessor Version (EC Version)  
8. Total Memory Size  
9. Battery code  
10. Sound System  
11. The number of printer ports  
12. The number of ASYNC ports  
13. The number of math co-processors  
14. PCMCIA Slot  
15. Modem/LAN Type  
16. The number of floppy disk drives  
17. The number of hard disk drives  
18. The number of HWSC  
19. The number of Wireless LAN  
20. The number of Bluetooth  
21. The number of IEEE1394  
22. The number of USB2.0, FIR  
23. Date/Time  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.23 System Configuration  
3.23.2 Operations  
Selecting 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following  
system configuration:  
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]  
* - Processor Type  
* - VGA Controller  
* - MS-DOS Version  
= XXXXXX  
= XXXXXX  
= V7.XX  
* - BIOS ROM Version = VX.XX 1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH  
* - BOOT ROM Version = VX.XX  
* - KBC Version  
= VX.XX  
* - PS Micon Version = V1.XX ( EC Version = VX.XX )  
* - Total Memory Size = XXXXXXMB ( Conventional Memory = 00639KB )  
* - Battery Code  
* - Sound System  
= XXXXX  
= XXXXX  
* - X Printer Adapter LPT1 = 0378 LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX  
* - X ASYNC Adapter  
* - X Math CO-Processor  
* - X PCMCIA Slot  
COM1 = 03F8 COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX  
* - X MODEM / LAN  
* - X Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX  
* - X Hard Disk Drive(s) #1 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX MB)  
* - X HWSC = XXXXXXX  
* - X Wireless LAN  
* - X Bluetooth  
#2 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX MB)  
* - X IEEE1394  
* - X USB2.0FIR  
Press [Enter] Key  
[Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]  
Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.  
3-48  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.24 Wireless LAN Test Program (Calexico)  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.24 Wireless LAN Test Program (Calexico)  
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test with the  
test program.  
NOTE: Use another computer (with Calexico wireless LAN card) that can communicate  
by the wireless LAN as a reference machine to perform this test. An access point  
is also required.  
In this test, the following items are tested.  
(1) Communication test (Main antenna, Aux antenna)  
(2) MAC address Check  
To start the Wireless LAN test program, follow the steps below:  
NOTE: Before starting the wireless LAN test, make sure the Wireless Communication  
Switch on the left side of the computer is turned on. (The Wireless  
Communication LED lights orange.) Release the write-protection of the floppy  
disk for the test.  
Setting the responder machine  
Connect the responder machine to the access point with a cross cable and turn on the access  
point.  
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the USB FDD of the  
responder machine and turn on the responder machine. Then wait until the following  
message appears.  
Setting the target machine  
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the USB FDD of the  
target machine and turn on the target machine. Then the test starts automatically.  
When the machine has passed the test, “OK !” message will appear on the target machine.  
Press any key to exit the test.  
When an error is detected during the test, “NG !” massage will appear. Press any key to  
display the NG item (Main antenna, Aux. antenna or MAC address check). The following  
message appears.  
*************************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
Main Antenna Test: NG !!  
*************************************************************  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)  
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test with the  
test program.  
NOTE: Use another computer (with Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g wireless LAN  
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to  
perform this test.  
When conducting this test, make sure that any wireless network device using  
2.4GHz band other than IEEE 802.11b, such as Bluetooth, is not used nearby.  
In this test, the following items are tested:  
* Test PC side  
(1) SKU (destination code) check  
(2) Mac Address check  
(3) Communication test (11a mode) (only for 11a/b/g card)  
(4) Communication test (11g mode)  
(5) Communication test (11b mode)  
This program conducts the above test items continuously and displays results for each item  
during the test. However, only the last result for the whole test shall be checked. (The  
message "OK" or "NG" is displayed.)  
When an "NG" item is detected during the test, the message "NG" is displayed on the screen  
and the test stops.  
To start the Wireless LAN test program, follow the steps below:  
NOTE: Before starting the wireless LAN test, make sure the Wireless  
Communication Switch on the left side of the computer is turned on. (The Wireless  
Communication LED lights orange.)  
3-50  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Setting the responder machine  
NOTE: Release the write-protection of the floppy disk for the test.  
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the floppy disk drive of the responder  
machine and turn on the responder machine. The Wireless LAN test menu will appear.  
###############################################################  
####  
Atheros WLAN sub system repair test VX.XX  
####  
###############################################################  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 .....Test PC [Initiator]  
0 .....[Responder]  
***************************************************************  
....Press test number [1,0] ?  
Press 0 and Enter in the responder machine. After a while, the following messages will  
appear. The latter message is updated ever 3 seconds.  
Waiting for transmitter to ring the bell in 11a mode.  
Input or output error (EIO) : rxDatBegin : nothing receive within  
3000millisecs(waitTime)  
The responder machine is ready for the test.  
Setting the tester machine  
NOTE: Release the write-protection of the floppy disk for the test.  
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the floppy disk drive of the tester  
machine and turn on the tester machine. The Wireless LAN test menu will appear.  
###############################################################  
####  
Atheros WLAN sub system repair test VX.XX  
####  
###############################################################  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 .....Test PC [Initiator]  
0 .....[Responder]  
***************************************************************  
....Press test number [1,0] ?  
Press 1 and Enter in the tester machine. After a while, the following message will appear:  
--------------------------------------------  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
mac address check OK !!  
...Press any key !!  
--------------------------------------------  
To proceed the test, press any key.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.25 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros 11b/g or 11a/b/g)  
When the tester machine has passed the test, "OK" message will appear in the tester machine.  
Press Enter to return to the main menu.  
When the tester machine has not passed the test, "NG" message will appear in the tester  
machine. Pressing Enter on the screen shows the following message.  
*************************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
8.02 11a Tx Test AUX Antenna NG  
*************************************************************  
Then the test returns to the main menu automatically.  
3-52  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program  
This section describes how to perform the Sound/LAN/Modem test with the test program.  
Insert the Test program disk in the floppy disk drive and turn on the power. The following  
message will appear:  
####################################################################  
#########  
XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM (SOUND/LAN/MODEM TEST)#####  
####################################################################  
*
*
* 1 ............ ( Microphoned recording & play )  
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 2 ............ ( LAN )  
*
* 3 ............ ( Modem )  
********************************************************************  
.... Press test number[1-3] ?  
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.  
NOTE: The system is capable of producing high volume sound, so when you use the  
headphones be careful to set the volume low and adjust it as necessary. Using the  
headphones at full volume could damage your ears.  
To execute a subtest continuously, select the test number and press Enter. To exit the  
Sound/LAN/Modem test, remove the test program disk from the USB FDD and turn off the  
power.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program  
Subtest 01  
Microphoned recording & play  
[Recording & play test !]  
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D D/A converter. Both the  
microphone and headphone terminals can be checked at the same time.  
Before executing this subtest, connect an external microphone to the  
computer. If necessary, connect a headphone to the computer to check  
whether the headphone jack of the computer is working properly.  
When the subtest is selected, the following message appears.  
....Press test number[1-3] ? pause  
Press any key to continue...  
Press any key. Then the sound is recorded for three seconds from the  
microphone. (The message similar to the one below appears.)  
....Press test number[1-3] ? call micrec  
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version 2.01a  
Copyright © Tenberry Software, Inc. 1996  
STACWAVE Version 3.01  
Build date: Dec 31 2002 at 13:22:33.  
Found PCI Audio Device, vendor ID: 0x8086 device ID: 0x24c5  
Recognized AC97 CODEC, vendorID1: 0x8384 vendorID2: 0x7650  
RECORDING “mic.wav”, channels: 1 bps 8 rate: 48000 Hz  
DONE RECORDING.  
Writing “mic.wav”.  
When the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded  
automatically. (The message similar to the one below appears.)  
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version 2.01a  
Copyright © Tenberry Software, Inc. 1996  
STACWAVE Version 3.01  
Build date: Dec 31 2002 at 13:22:33.  
Loading “mic.wav”  
Found PCI Audio Device, vendor ID: 0x8086 device ID: 0x24c5  
Recognized AC97 CODEC, vendorID1: 0x8384 vendorID2: 0x7650  
Playing “mic.wav”, channels: 1 bps 8 rate: 48000 Hz  
When this subtest is completed, the screen returns to the main menu  
automatically.  
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one  
shown above.  
3-54  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
Subtest 02  
LAN  
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback in the chip.  
Select 3 to execute and press Enter. The following message will appear:  
[LAN transmit & receive test !]  
COMPLETED Repeat count =  
Error count =  
00000  
00000  
LOOPBACK TEST  
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test  
Destination Address  
Source Address  
= xxxxxxxxxxxx  
= xxxxxxxxxxxx  
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **  
< TRANSMIT >  
< RECEIVE >  
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one  
shown above.  
Check that the message “OK” appears.  
Subtest 03  
Modem  
For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness.  
Use the dedicated “FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01  
made by Nitto Denki Seisakusyo)” for the tests.  
Select 4 to execute and press Enter. The following message will appear:  
[Modem loopback test !]  
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)  
Version X.X  
* Scorpio Modem Initialize  
* Digital Loopback Test  
* Modem Sound Test  
:OK  
:OK  
:(Operator’s Check!!)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.26 Sound/LAN/Modem Test Program  
After a few seconds, the following message will appear:  
...Press Key (Y = OK, N =NG)  
If you hear the modem sound from the speakers, press Y, otherwise, press N.  
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one  
shown above.  
After you press Y or N, the RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check  
LED) test will be executed, and the following message will appear:  
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)  
If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y.  
Otherwise, press N.  
3-56  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.27 IEEE1394 test program  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.27 IEEE1394 test program  
This section describes how to perform the IEEE1394 test with the test program.  
NOTE:  
Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a  
reference machine to perform this test.  
Toshiba MS-DOS is required to run the DIAGNOSTICS TEST PROGRAM. To start the  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM, follow these steps:  
(a) Insert the Diagnostics disk in the floppy disk drive and turn on the computer.  
(The Diagnostics Disk contains the MS-DOS boot files.)  
The following menu will appear:  
********************************************************************  
*
XXXXX IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program  
*
********************************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ....Transmit & Receive test  
2 ....Responder set  
3 ....1394 GUID Display  
********************************************************************  
.... Press test number[1-3] ?  
(b) To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Transmit & Receive test  
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and  
target machine.  
Subtest 02  
Subtest 03  
Responder set  
This program initializes the machine responder.  
1394 GUID Display  
This program checks the GUID.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Tests and Diagnostics  
3.27 IEEE1394 test program  
3-58  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Replacement Procedures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4-ii  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Chapter 4  
Contents  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Battery Pack............................................................................................................... 4-9  
PC Card.................................................................................................................... 4-11  
SD Card.................................................................................................................... 4-13  
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-14  
Optical Drive............................................................................................................ 4-17  
Memory Module/Modem Daughter Card................................................................ 4-20  
4.7.1  
4.7.2  
Memory Module................................................................................. 4-20  
Modem Daughter Card....................................................................... 4-22  
4.8  
4.9  
Wireless LAN Board................................................................................................ 4-24  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-26  
4.10 Switch Cover ASSY/Switch Membrane.................................................................. 4-29  
4.11 Display Assembly.................................................................................................... 4-32  
4.12 Touch Pad Button .................................................................................................... 4-36  
4.13 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-37  
4.14 Touch Pad ................................................................................................................ 4-39  
4.15 RTC Battery............................................................................................................. 4-41  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad Holder.............................................................................. 4-43  
4.16.1 Sound Board....................................................................................... 4-43  
4.16.2 Touch Pad Holder............................................................................... 4-45  
4.17 CD-Key ASSY......................................................................................................... 4-46  
4.18 System Board........................................................................................................... 4-47  
4.19 CPU.......................................................................................................................... 4-50  
4.20 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-53  
4.21 Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-55  
4.22 USB Board/DC-IN Jack/Network Jack ................................................................... 4-56  
4.23 Power Board/RGB Board ........................................................................................ 4-58  
4.24 Display Mask ........................................................................................................... 4-61  
4.25 FL Inverter ............................................................................................................... 4-63  
4.26 LCD Module............................................................................................................ 4-65  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.27 Sensor/Switch Board................................................................................................ 4-69  
4.28 LCD Cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge ............................................................. 4-70  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-76  
4.29.1 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp ................ 4-77  
4.29.2 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA LG.Phiips Fluorescent Lamp......... 4-89  
4.29.3 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp........... 4-97  
Figures  
Figure 4-1  
Figure 4-2  
Figure 4-3  
Figure 4-4  
Figure 4-5  
Figure 4-6  
Figure 4-7  
Figure 4-8  
Figure 4-9  
Removing the Battery pack............................................................................ 4-9  
Removing the PC card ................................................................................. 4-11  
Removing the SD card................................................................................. 4-13  
Removing the HDD cover ........................................................................... 4-14  
Removing the HDD bracket and HDD........................................................ 4-15  
Removing the Optical drive......................................................................... 4-17  
Disassembling the Optical drive.................................................................. 4-18  
Removing the Memory module ................................................................... 4-20  
Removing the Modem daughter card........................................................... 4-22  
Figure 4-10 Removing the Wireless LAN board............................................................. 4-24  
Figure 4-11 Removing the Keyboard brace and Keyboard hold plate............................ 4-26  
Figure 4-12 Removing the Keyboard support plate ........................................................ 4-27  
Figure 4-13 Removing the Switch cover ASSY.............................................................. 4-29  
Figure 4-14 Removing the Switch membrane................................................................. 4-30  
Figure 4-15 Removing the Display assembly (1)............................................................ 4-32  
Figure 4-16 Removing the Display assembly (2)............................................................ 4-33  
Figure 4-17 Removing the Display assembly (3)............................................................ 4-34  
Figure 4-18 Removing the Touch pad button.................................................................. 4-36  
Figure 4-19 Removing the Microphone .......................................................................... 4-37  
Figure 4-20 Removing the Microphone cable................................................................. 4-37  
Figure 4-21 Removing the Touch pad............................................................................. 4-39  
Figure 4-22 Removing the RTC battery.......................................................................... 4-42  
Figure 4-23 Removing the Sound board.......................................................................... 4-43  
4-iv  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Figure 4-24 Removing the Touch pad holder.................................................................. 4-45  
Figure 4-25 Removing the CD-key assembly ................................................................. 4-46  
Figure 4-26 Removing the System board (1) .................................................................. 4-47  
Figure 4-27 Removing the System board (2) .................................................................. 4-48  
Figure 4-28 Removing the CPU holder and Fin.............................................................. 4-51  
Figure 4-29 Unlocking the CPU...................................................................................... 4-51  
Figure 4-30 Applying new Grease................................................................................... 4-52  
Figure 4-31 Removing the Speakers................................................................................ 4-53  
Figure 4-32 Removing the Cable holder ......................................................................... 4-54  
Figure 4-33 Removing the Fan........................................................................................ 4-55  
Figure 4-34 Removing the USB board/DC-IN jack/network jack .................................. 4-56  
Figure 4-35 Removing the Battery plate ......................................................................... 4-58  
Figure 4-36 Removing the RGB board............................................................................ 4-58  
Figure 4-37 Removing the Power board.......................................................................... 4-59  
Figure 4-38 Removing the Display mask........................................................................ 4-61  
Figure 4-39 Removing the FL inverter............................................................................ 4-63  
Figure 4-40 Removing the LCD module (1) ................................................................... 4-66  
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD module (2) ................................................................... 4-67  
Figure 4-42 Removing the Sensor/switch board ............................................................. 4-69  
Figure 4-43 Removing the LCD cable holder ................................................................. 4-70  
Figure 4-44 Removing the Cable holder ......................................................................... 4-70  
Figure 4-45 Removing the Wireless LAN antenna ......................................................... 4-71  
Figure 4-46 Removing the Hinge cap.............................................................................. 4-72  
Figure 4-47 Removing the Hinge (LCD cable side)........................................................ 4-72  
Figure 4-48 Removing the Circle plate ........................................................................... 4-73  
Figure 4-49 Removing the Hinge .................................................................................... 4-73  
Figure 4-50 Sticking the copper sheets and gasket.......................................................... 4-75  
Figure 4-51 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1).......................................... 4-78  
Figure 4-52 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2).......................................... 4-79  
Figure 4-53 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3).......................................... 4-80  
Figure 4-54 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4).......................................... 4-81  
Figure 4-55 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5).......................................... 4-82  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Figure 4-56 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (6).......................................... 4-83  
Figure 4-57 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (7).......................................... 4-84  
Figure 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (8).......................................... 4-85  
Figure 4-59 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (9).......................................... 4-86  
Figure 4-60 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (10)........................................ 4-87  
Figure 4-61 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (11)........................................ 4-88  
Figure 4-62 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1) ................................. 4-89  
Figure 4-63 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2) ................................. 4-90  
Figure 4-64 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3) ................................. 4-91  
Figure 4-65 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4) ................................. 4-92  
Figure 4-66 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5) ................................. 4-93  
Figure 4-67 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (6) ................................. 4-94  
Figure 4-68 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (7) ................................. 4-95  
Figure 4-69 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (8) ................................. 4-96  
Figure 4-70 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1) .................................... 4-97  
Figure 4-71 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2) .................................... 4-98  
Figure 4-72 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3) .................................... 4-98  
Figure 4-73 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4) .................................... 4-99  
Figure 4-74 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5) .................................... 4-99  
4-vi  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 General  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4
Replacement Procedures  
4.1 General  
This section explains how to disassemble the computer and replace Field Replaceable Units  
(FRUs). It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one. The chart  
below is a guide to which FRUs need to be removed in order to remove others. Always start  
by removing the battery pack, next, optional items such as the optional PC card and optional  
SD card, then follow the line on the chart to determine which FRU you must remove next in  
order to repair the one you think is causing the computer to operate improperly. Refer to the  
example at the bottom of the page.  
How to See the Chart  
Two examples of  
referring to the chart are  
shown below.  
Removing the Display  
assembly  
4.2 Battery to 4.10 Switch  
cover ASSY/Switch  
membrane must be  
removed.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.1 General  
Safety Precautions  
Before you begin disassembly, read the following safety precautions and observe them  
carefully as you work.  
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or  
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different  
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or  
explode.  
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage  
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that  
could cause the battery pack to explode.  
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high  
voltages. If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled  
computer to check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors  
or components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.  
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level  
maintenance.  
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power  
source, to avoid exposure to electric shock.  
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger  
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC  
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as  
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric  
shock. Never work with wet or damp hands.  
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.  
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component  
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any  
risk of damage to the computer.  
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never  
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the  
unit. Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed.  
Make sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause  
short circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.  
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to  
the component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of  
accidental electric shock.  
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the  
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.  
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for  
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in  
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.  
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,  
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have  
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.  
4-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 General  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Before You Begin  
Look over the procedures in this section before you begin disassembling the computer.  
Familiarize yourself with the disassembly and reassembly steps. Begin each procedure by  
removing the AC adapter and the battery pack as instructed in this section:  
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.  
2. Use only the correct and approved tools.  
3. Make sure the working environment is free from the following elements whether you  
are using or storing the computer.  
Dust and contaminates  
Static electricity  
Extreme heat, cold and humidity  
4. Make sure the FRU you are replacing is causing the abnormal operation by  
performing the necessary diagnostics tests described in this manual.  
5. Do not perform any operations that are not necessary and use only the described  
procedures for disassembling and installing FRUs in the computer.  
6. After removing parts from the computer, place them in a safe place away from the  
computer so they will not be damaged and will not interfere with your work.  
7. You will remove and replace many screws when you disassemble the computer.  
When you remove screws, make sure they are placed in a safe place and identified  
with the correct parts.  
8. When assembling the computer make sure you use the correct screws to secure the  
various pieces in place. Screw sizes are listed in their corresponding figures.  
9. The computer contains many sharp edges and corners, so be careful not to injure  
yourself.  
10. After you have replaced an FRU, make sure the computer is functioning properly by  
performing the appropriate test on the FRU you have fixed or replaced.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.1 General  
Disassembly Procedures  
The computer has two basic types of cable connectors:  
Pressure Plate Connectors  
Coaxial Cable Connectors  
Normal Pin Connectors  
To disconnect a Pressure Plate connector, lift up the tabs on either side of the connector’s  
plastic pressure plate and slide the cable out of the connector. To connect the cable to a  
Pressure Plate connector, make sure the pressure plate is fully lifted and slide the cable into  
the connector. Secure the cable in place by pushing the sides of the pressure plate down so  
the plate is flush with the sides of the connector. Gently pull on the cable to make sure the  
cable is secure. If you pull out the connector, connect it again making sure the connector’s  
pressure plate is fully lifted when you insert the cable.  
Coaxial cables should be disconnected with an antenna coaxial disconnector.  
Standard pin connectors are used with all other cables. These connectors can be connected  
and disconnected by simply pulling them apart or pushing them together.  
Assembly Procedures  
After you have disassembled the computer and fixed or repaired the problem that was  
causing the computer to operate abnormally, you will need to reassemble the computer.  
Install all the removed FRUs following the steps described in the corresponding sections in  
this chapter.  
While assembling the computer, remember the following general points:  
Take your time, making sure you follow the instructions closely. Most problems  
arise when you get in a hurry assembling the computer.  
Make sure all cables and connectors are securely fastened.  
Before securing the FRU or other parts, make sure that screws or the FRU will  
pinch no cables.  
Check that all latches are closed securely in place.  
Make sure all the correct screws are used to secure all FRUs. Using the wrong  
screw can either damage the threads on the screw or the head of the screw and  
may prevent proper seating of an FRU.  
After installing an FRU in the computer, confirm that the FRU and the computer are  
functioning properly.  
4-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 General  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Tools and Equipment  
The use of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment is very important for your safety and the  
safety of those around you. Proper use of these devices will increase the success rate of your  
repairs and lower the cost for damaged or destroyed parts. The following equipment is  
necessary to disassemble and reassemble the computer:  
One M2 point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws.  
One M2.5/M3 point size 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws.  
One 4 mm flat-blade screwdriver.  
Tweezers, to lift out screws that you cannot grasp with your fingers.  
ESD mats for the floor and the table you are working on.  
An ESD wrist strap or heel grounder.  
Anti-static carpeting or flooring.  
Air ionizers in highly static sensitive areas.  
Antenna coaxial cable disconnector  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.1 General  
Screw Tightening Torque  
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.  
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws; undertightening can  
result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or components come  
loose.  
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screwdriver for quick and easy  
operations.  
M2  
M2.5  
M3  
0.17 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)  
0.30 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)  
0.57 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)  
NOTE: The computer contains several flat head screws. These screws have less contact  
area with the screwdriver, so be careful to press firmly enough to prevent the  
screwdriver from slipping out and damaging the screw head.  
4-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 General  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Color of Screw Shaft  
To avoid mistakes on the screw length, screw shafts are colored as follows:  
Even number length screw:  
Odd number length screw:  
Special length screw:  
brown  
white  
blue  
Screws whose lengths are indicated to one or more decimal places such as 2.5 mm or  
2.8 mm.  
Marking of Screws on the Computer Body  
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including  
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.  
Kind of screws  
Symbol  
BIND screw  
B
F
FLAT HEAD screw  
SUPER FLAT HEAD screw  
TAPPING screw  
S
T
U
Other screws  
(Unique screws, STUD, etc.)  
Examples:  
6 mm BIND screw  
B6  
12 mm BIND screw  
5 mm FLAT HEAD screw  
B12  
F5  
(Indicates the screwed length in round number regardless the length of the stud.)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.2 Battery Pack  
4.2 Battery Pack  
Removing the Battery Pack  
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.  
CAUTION: When handling battery packs, be careful not to short circuit the terminals.  
Also do not drop, hit or apply impact; do not scratch, break, twist or bend  
the battery pack.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC cable and other external devices from the computer.  
3. Turn the computer face down.  
4. Release the battery lock while sliding the battery latch, pull out the battery pack to  
the arrow direction in the figure below.  
NOTE: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent battery pack. Collect the  
spent battery packs.  
Battery latch  
Battery lock  
Battery  
Figure 4-1 Removing the Battery pack  
4-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Battery Pack  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the Battery Pack  
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.  
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly  
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect  
the spent battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba as  
replacements.  
NOTE: Check the battery's terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a  
dry cloth.  
1. Push the battery pack into the battery slot. Make sure the battery pack is installed  
securely.  
2. Slide the battery lock into the lock position.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.3 PC Card  
4.3 PC Card  
Removing the PC Card  
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.  
CAUTION: Before you remove a PC card, refer to the card's documentation and your  
operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.  
1. Turn the computer face up.  
2. Push the eject button. It will pop out when you release it. Then press once more the  
eject button to eject the PC card.  
3. Grasp the PC card and pull it out.  
PC card  
Eject button  
Figure 4-2 Removing the PC card  
4-10  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.3 PC Card  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the PC Card  
To install the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.  
1. Make sure the eject button does not stick out.  
2. Insert the PC card and press it until it is securely connected.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.4 SD Card  
4.4 SD Card  
Removing the SD Card  
To remove the SD card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.  
CAUTION: Before you remove the SD card, refer to the card's documentation and to  
your operating system documentation for proper procedures and  
precautions.  
1. Turn the computer face up.  
2. Push the SD card. It will pop out partly when you release, so pull out the card.  
SD card  
Figure 4-3 Removing the SD card  
Installing the SD Card  
To install the SD card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.  
1. Insert the SD card and press it until it is securely connected.  
4-12  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.5 HDD  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.5 HDD  
CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the top surface as shown by the arrow.  
Hold it by the sides.  
HDD  
Removing the HDD  
To remove the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-4 and 4-5.  
1. Turn the computer upside down.  
2. Remove the following screw securing the HDD cover. Remove the HDD cover by  
lifting up.  
M2.5×10B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×10B FLAT HEAD  
HDD cover  
HDD pack  
Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD cover  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.5 HDD  
3. Push the tab of the HDD pack to the direction of the arrow and remove the HDD  
pack. Be careful not to damage the connector.  
NOTE: The following steps describe how to disassemble the HDD pack; however, do not  
disassemble if the HDD is working properly.  
4. Remove the following screws.  
M3×4S  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
5. Remove the HDD bracket.  
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the top or bottom of the HDD.  
6. Remove the HDD from the aluminum laminate.  
M3×4S FLAT HEAD  
Aluminum laminate  
HDD bracket  
M3×4S FLAT HEAD  
HDD  
Figure 4-5 Removing the HDD bracket and HDD  
4-14  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.5 HDD  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the HDD  
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-4 and 4-5.  
CAUTION: Do not hold the HDD by its top and bottom flat surfaces. It may damage the  
HDD.  
1. Install the HDD to the aluminum laminate.  
2. Place the HDD in the bracket.  
3. Secure the HDD to the HDD bracket with the following screws.  
M3×4S  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the middle of the HDD pack. It may damage the  
HDD pack. Hold the HDD pack by its corners.  
4. Hold the HDD pack and place it in the slot. Slide the HDD pack to the connector of  
the computer to connect. Press to ensure a firm connection.  
5. Seat the HDD cover and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×10B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.6 Optical Drive  
4.6 Optical Drive  
Removing the Optical Drive  
To remove the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-6 and 4-7.  
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to the top of an optical drive.  
1. Remove the following screws securing the optical drive.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
2. Slide the optical drive outward to disconnect it from the connector PJ1820 on the  
system board.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Optical drive  
Figure 4-6 Removing the optical drive  
4-16  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.6 Optical Drive  
4 Replacement Procedures  
3. Remove the following screws securing the plastic frame.  
M2×3C  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
Stepping screw  
×1  
Optical Drive  
M2×3CS-FLAT HEAD  
Stepping screw  
Plastic frame  
M2×3CS-FLAT HEAD  
Figure 4-7 Disassembling the optical drivel  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.6 Optical Drive  
Installing the Optical drive  
To install the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-6 and 4-7.  
1. Seat the plastic frame on the side of the optical drive, and secure it with the  
following screws.  
M2×3C  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
Stepping screw  
×1  
2. Slide the optical drive into the slot to connect it to the connector PJ1820 on the  
system board.  
3. Secure the optical drive with the following screws.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
4-18  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.7 Memory module/ Modem Daughter Card  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.7 Memory module/ Modem Daughter Card  
CAUTION: The power of the computer must be turned off when you remove the memory  
module. Removing a memory module with the power on risks damaging the  
module or the computer itself.  
Do not touch the memory module terminals. Any dirt on the terminals may  
cause memory access problems.  
Never press hard or bend the memory module.  
4.7.1 Memory module  
Removing the memory module  
To remove a memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform the  
following procedures (See Figure 4-8).  
1. Turn the computer upside down.  
2. Loosen the screw (e-ring) fixing the memory slot cover.  
3. Remove the memory slot cover.  
4. Open the left and right latches and remove the memory module.  
Memory slot cover  
Screw  
Memory module  
Latches  
Figure 4-8 Removing the memory module  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.7 Memory module/ Modem Daughter Card  
Installing the memory module  
To install the memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then follow the  
steps below and refer to figures 4-8.  
1. Insert the memory module into the connector of the computer slantwise (terminal  
side first) and press it to connect firmly.  
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you insert the memory module. Inserting  
a memory module with the power on might damage the module or the  
computer itself.  
Never press hard or bend the memory module.  
2. Install the memory slot cover and secure it with the screw (e-ring).  
3. When the power of the computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically the  
memory size. Confirm that the new memory is detected correctly.  
4. If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.  
4-20  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.7 Memory module/ Modem Daughter Card  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.7.2 Modem Daughter Card  
Removing the Modem Daughter Card  
To remove the modem daughter card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-9.  
1. Remove the following screws securing the modem daughter card.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×2  
2. Lift up the modem daughter card to disconnect it from the connector PJ3000 on the  
system board.  
4. Disconnect the modem cable from CN1 on the modem daughter card.  
M2×4B BIND  
Modem cable  
MDC  
PJ3000  
Figure 4-9 Removing the modem daughter card  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.7 Memory module/ Modem Daughter Card  
Installing the Modem Daughter Card  
To install the modem daughter card, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-9.  
1. Connect the modem cable to CN1 on the modem daughter card.  
2. Connect the modem daughter card to the connector PJ3000 on the system board.  
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the card or connector.  
3. Secure the modem daughter card with the following screws.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×2  
4. Place the memory slot cover and secure it with the screw (e-ring).  
4-22  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.8 Wireless LAN board  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.8 Wireless LAN board  
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you remove the wireless LAN board.  
Removing the wireless LAN board with the power on risks damaging the  
card or the computer itself.  
Never press hard or bend the wireless LAN board.  
Removing the wireless LAN board  
To remove the wireless LAN board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-10.  
1. Turn the computer upside down.  
2. Loosen the screw fixing the wireless LAN board cover.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×1  
Or  
M2×4  
LH STICK screw  
×1  
3. Peel off the glass tape and disconnect the two wireless LAN antenna cables (black  
and white) from the wireless LAN board.  
4. Open the left and right latches holding the wireless LAN board and remove it.  
Wireless LAN board cover  
M2×4B BIND or M2×4 LH STICK  
Antenna cable (black)  
Glass tape  
Wireless LAN board  
Antenna cable (white)  
Figure 4-10 Removing the wireless LAN board  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.8 Wireless LAN board  
Installing the wireless LAN board  
To install the wireless LAN board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-10.  
1. Insert the wireless LAN board terminals slantwise into the connector on the  
computer and press the wireless LAN board until it is securely in place.  
2. Connect the wireless LAN cables (black and white) to the terminals on the wireless  
LAN board and fix them with the glass tape.  
3. Place the wireless LAN board cover and secure it with the following screw.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×1  
Or  
M2×4  
LH STICK screw  
×1  
4-24  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.9 Keyboard  
4
Replacement Procedures  
4.9 Keyboard  
Removing the Keyboard  
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-11 to 4-12.  
1. Turn the computer face up and open the display panel.  
2. Insert your finger into the latches between the keyboard brace and the computer, and  
lift up the keyboard brace to unlatch and remove it.  
3. Remove the following screw securing the keyboard and keyboard hold plates. Then  
remove the keyboard hold plate.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×1  
Or  
M2×4  
LH STICK screw  
×1  
Keyboard brace  
M2 4B BIND or M2 4 LH STICK  
×
×
M2 4B BIND or M2 4 LH STICK  
×
×
Keyboard hold plate  
Figure 4-11 Removing the keyboard brace and keyboard hold plate  
4-26  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.9 Keyboard  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4. Lift the upper side of the keyboard out and turn it’s face down on the palm rest.  
5. Remove the following screw securing the keyboard support plate and remove the  
keyboard support plate.  
M2.5×8B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD  
Keyboard support  
plate  
PJ3200  
Keyboard cable  
Figure 4-12 Removing the keyboard support plate  
7. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the connector PJ3200 on the system board, and  
remove the keyboard.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.9 Keyboard  
Installing the Keyboard  
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-11 to 4-12.  
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest.  
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the connector PJ3200 on the system board.  
3. Place the keyboard support plate and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
4. Turn the keyboard face up and put it on the computer. Make sure that there is no gap  
between the keyboard and the computer.  
5. Place the keyboard hold plates on the keyboard. Then secure the keyboard hold  
plates and the keyboard with the following screws.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×2  
Or  
M2×4  
LH STICK screw  
×2  
6. Install the keyboard brace by pressing it from the topside.  
4-28  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.10 Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.10 Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
Removing the Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
To remove the Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane, follow the steps below and refer to  
figure 4-13 and 4-14.  
1. Remove the switch cover ASSY by lifting the left side up, while releasing the latches.  
Switch cover ASSY  
Figure 4-13 Removing the switch cover ASSY  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.10 Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
2. Pull up the insulator.  
3. Disconnect the switch membrane cable from the connector PJ7001 on the system  
board.  
4. Remove the following screws fixing the switch membrane.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
5. Remove the switch membrane by lifting up the left side of the switch membrane.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
PJ7001  
Switch membrane  
Insulator  
Figure 4-14 Removing the switch membrane  
4-30  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.10 Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane  
To install the Switch cover ASSY/Switch membrane, follow the steps below and refer to  
figure 4-13 and 4-14.  
1. Place the switch membrane with the right side under the guides and secure it with  
the following screws.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
2. Connect the switch membrane cable to the connector PJ7001 on the system board.  
3. Stick the insulator to fix the switch membrane.  
4. Install the switch cover ASSY and engage the right-side latches.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.11 Display Assembly  
4.11 Display Assembly  
Removing the Display Assembly  
To remove the display assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures  
4-15 to 4-17.  
1. Turn the computer face down, and remove the following screws.  
M2.5×16B  
M2.5×10B  
M2×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
BIND screw  
×8 (“16” in the figure below)  
×8 (“10” in the figure below)  
×2 (“6” in the figure below)  
×1 (“4” in the figure below)  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
10  
6
10  
6
10  
10  
10  
16  
10  
16  
16  
16  
10  
10  
16  
4
16  
16  
16  
Figure 4-15 Removing the display assembly (1)  
4-32  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.11 Display Assembly  
4 Replacement Procedures  
2. Turn the computer face up and open the display panel.  
3. Remove the following screws securing the display assembly.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×3  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
4. Disconnect the LCD cable from the connector PJ5600 on the system board.  
5. Disconnect the two wireless LAN cables from the connectors, white and black on the  
power board.  
6. Disconnect the internal microphone cable from the connector PJ6001 on the system  
board.  
7. Disconnect the panel switch cable from the connector PJ7004 on the system board.  
Wireless LAN cable (black)  
Wireless LAN cable (white)  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
PJ7004  
PJ5600  
PJ6001  
Figure 4-16 Removing the display assembly (2)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.11 Display Assembly  
8. Remove the display assembly from the base assembly.  
Display assembly  
Figure 4-17 Removing the display assembly (3)  
NOTE: When removing the display assembly, be careful not to damage any cables.  
4-34  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.11 Display Assembly  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the Display Assembly  
To install the display assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-15 to 4-17.  
1. Install the display assembly on the base assembly.  
NOTE: When installing the display assembly, be careful not to pinch or damage any  
cables.  
2. Press along the edges of the display assembly to secure the latches.  
3. Connect the panel switch cable to the connector PJ7004 on the system board.  
4. Connect the internal microphone cable to the connector PJ6001 on the system  
board.  
5. Connect the LCD cable to the connector PJ5600 on the system board.  
6. Connect the two wireless LAN cables to the connectors, white and black on the  
power board.  
7. Secure the display assembly with the following screws.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×3  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
8. Turn the computer face down and secure the display assembly with the following  
screws.  
M2.5×16B  
M2.5×10B  
M2×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
BIND screw  
×8  
×8  
×2  
×1  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.12 Touch Pad Button  
4.12 Touch Pad Button  
Removing the Touch Pad Button  
To remove the touch pad button, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-18.  
1. Remove the following screws fixing the touch pad button.  
M2.5×4  
Tapping screw  
×3  
2. Remove the touch pad button.  
M2.5×4 Tapping  
Touch pad button  
Figure 4-18 Removing the touch pad button  
Installing the Touch Pad Button  
To installing the touch pad button, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-18.  
1. Install the touch pad button and fix it with the following screws.  
M2.5×4  
Tapping screw  
×3  
4-36  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.13 Microphone  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.13 Microphone  
Removing the Microphone  
To remove the Microphone, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-19 and 20.  
1. Remove the microphone from the guide.  
Microphone  
Figure 4-19 Removing the microphone  
2. Peel the insulator on the back and remove the microphone cable from the guide.  
3. Remove the microphone (with cable) through the hole to the front.  
Insulator  
Microphone cable  
Figure 4-20 Removing the microphone cable  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.13 Microphone  
Installing the Microphone  
To install the Microphone, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-19 and 20.  
1. Pass the microphone cable from the front to the back.  
2. Set the microphone, putting the hole in the guide.  
3. Pass the microphone cable through the slot with guides.  
4-38  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.14 Touch Pad  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.14 Touch Pad  
Removing the Touch Pad  
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-21.  
1. Disconnect the touch pad flexible cable from the connector PJ3201 on the system  
board.  
2. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad.  
M2.5×8B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×4B  
×1  
3. Remove the touch pad.  
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD  
Touch pad flexible cable  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Figure 4-21 Removing the touch pad  
4. Disconnect the touch pad flexible cable from the connector on the touch pad.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.14 Touch Pad  
Installing the Touch Pad  
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-21.  
1. Connect the touch pad flexible cable to the connector on the touch pad.  
2. Install the touch pad and secure it with the following screws.  
M2.5×8B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×4B  
×1  
3. Connect the touch pad flexible cable to the connector PJ3201 on the system board.  
4-40  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.15 RTC Battery  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.15 RTC Battery  
WARNING: When replacing the RTC battery, be sure to use genuine batteries or  
replacement batteries authorized by Toshiba. Installing the wrong battery  
could cause a battery explosion or other damage.  
If the RTC battery is found abnormal, it must not be installed. Replace it  
with a new battery, and dispose of the old one according to the local  
regulations.  
Check for any of the following signs of damage:  
1)  
Electrolyte leakage  
Corrosion (greenish color) on the battery connector or cable  
Corrosion on the computer's battery connector  
White powder on any part of the battery  
White powder in the battery tray  
Clear liquid on the battery  
Clear liquid in the battery tray  
Clear liquid on any board near the battery  
2)  
3)  
Damage to the connection cable  
Damage to the connector housing  
If any powder or liquid is found in or around the battery tray, clean it. Be  
careful not to let any leaked material contact your eyes or mouth. Do not  
inhale fumes from leaked material.  
If leaked material contacts your skin, eyes or mouth, wash the affected area  
thoroughly with clean water.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.15 RTC Battery  
Removing the RTC Battery  
To remove the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-22.  
1. Peel off the insulator.  
2. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector PJ8490 on the system board.  
3. Remove the RTC battery.  
Insulator  
Insulator  
RTC battery  
RTC battery cable  
Figure 4-22 Removing the RTC battery  
Installing the RTC Battery  
To install the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-22.  
1. Place the RTC battery into the slot.  
2. Pass the RTC battery cable through the battery guide and connect the RTC battery  
cable to the connector PJ8490 on the system board.  
3. Fix the RTC battery with the insulator.  
4-42  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad holder  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad holder  
4.16.1 Sound Board  
Removing the Sound Board  
To remove the sound board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-23.  
1. Remove the following screw and the sound board.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
2. Disconnect the sound board I/F cable from the connector on the sound board.  
3. Peel the insulator.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
Sound board  
I/F cable  
Sound board  
Insulator  
Figure 4-23 Removing the sound board  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad holder  
Installing the Sound Board  
To install the sound board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-23.  
1. Connect the sound board I/F cable to the connector on the sound board and secure it  
with the insulator.  
2. Install the sound board from the side with jacks and secure it with the following  
screw.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
4-44  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.16 Sound Board/Touch Pad holder  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.16.2 Touch Pad holder  
Removing the Touch Pad holder  
To remove the touch pad holder, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-24.  
1. Disconnect the sound board I/F cable from the connector PJ7002 on the system  
board.  
2. Remove the touch pad holder from the system board.  
I/F cable  
Sound board  
Touch pad holder  
Figure 4-24 Removing the touch pad holder  
Installing the Touch Pad holder  
To install the touch pad holder, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-24.  
1. Install the touch pad holder on the system board.  
2. Connect the sound board I/F cable to the connector PJ7002 on the system board.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.17 CD-Key assembly  
4.17 CD-Key assembly  
Removing the CD-Key assembly  
To remove the CD-key assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-25.  
1. Disconnect the CD-key flexible cable from the connector PJ7000 on the system  
board.  
2. Remove the following screw and the CD-key assembly.  
M2×4B  
BIND screw  
×1  
M2×4B BIND  
CD-key flexible cable  
CD-key  
Figure 4-25 Removing the CD-key assembly  
Installing the CD-Key assembly  
To install the CD-key assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-25.  
1. Place the CD-key assembly and secure it with the following screw.  
M2×4B  
BIND screw  
×1  
2. Connect the CD-key flexible cable to the connector PJ7000 on the system board.  
4-46  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.18 System Board  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.18 System Board  
Removing the System Board  
To remove the system board, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-26 and 4-27.  
1. Peel off the glass tape and disconnect the RGB cable from the connector PJ5621 on  
the system board.  
2. Disconnect the speaker cables from the connectors PJ6003 (red) and PJ6004 (blue)  
on the system board.  
3. Disconnect the USB cable from the connector PJ7003 on the system board.  
4. Peel off the glass tapes and disconnect the battery cable from the connector PJ8810  
and the network cable from the connector PJ4100on the system board.  
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the connector PJ8770 on the system board and the  
power cable from the connector CN3 on the power board.  
6. Peel off the glass tape and disconnect the USB cable from the connector PJ7005 on  
the system board.(VRAM64 only)  
Glass tape  
Glass tape  
Glass tape  
Fan cable  
Network cable  
USB cable  
Speaker cable (red)  
Speaker cable (blue)  
Battery cable  
Glass tape  
Power cable  
RGB cable  
USB cable  
*Case of the VRAM64 only  
Figure 4-26 Removing the system board (1)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.18 System Board  
7. Remove the following screws securing the system board.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
8. Lift up the right side of the system board and remove it.  
M2.5 6B FLAT HEAD  
×
System board  
Figure 4-27 Removing the system board (2)  
4-48  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.18 System Board  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the System Board  
To install the system board, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-26 and 27.  
1. Install the system board from the left side.  
NOTE: When installing the system board, be careful not to pinch or damage the USB  
cable, RGB cable, battery cable speaker cable, network cable, fan cable or  
power cable.  
2. Secure the system board with the following screws.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
3. Connect the USB cable to the connector PJ7005 on the system board and stick the  
glass tape.(VRAM64 only)  
4. Connect the fan cable to the connector PJ8770 on the system board.  
5. Connect the RGB cable to the connector PJ5621 on the system board and stick the  
glass tape.  
6. Connect the battery cable to the connector PJ8810 on the system board.  
7. Connect the power cable to the connector CN3 on the power board.  
8. Connect the USB cable to the connector PJ7003 on the system board.  
9. Connect the speaker cables to the connectors PJ6003 and PJ6004 on the system  
board.  
10. Connect the network cable to the connector PJ4100 on the system board and stick  
the glass tapes.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.19 CPU  
4
Replacement Procedures  
4.19 CPU  
Removing the CPU  
To remove the CPU, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-28 and 4-29.  
CAUTION: 1) The CPU can become very hot during operation. Be sure to let it cool  
before starting repair work.  
2) When you remove the CPU, wipe the grease off of the bottom of the fin  
and top of the CPU. Apply new grease when installing.  
1. Remove the following screws securing the CPU holder, in the reverse order of the  
number marked on the holder.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
2. Remove the CPU holder.  
3. Remove the fin.  
×3  
4-50  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.19 CPU  
4 Replacement Procedures  
CAUTION: Silicon grease is applied between the fin and the CPU. When removing the  
fin, be careful not to damage the CPU under the fin.  
M2×4B BIND  
CPU holder  
FIN  
Figure4-28 Removing the CPU holder and fin  
4. Unlock the CPU by rotating the cam on the CPU socket 180 degrees  
counterclockwise with a flat-blade screwdriver (in the order shown in the figure  
below).  
5. Remove the CPU.  
Cam  
Figure 4-29 Unlocking the CPU  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.19 CPU  
Installing the CPU  
To install the CPU, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-28 to 4-30.  
1. Make sure the cam is in the open position.  
2. Seat the CPU in the CPU socket. Make sure the position is exact to avoid damaging  
pins on the CPU.  
3. Fix the CPU by rotating the cam 180 degrees clockwise with a flat-blade  
screwdriver.  
4. Apply new grease on the CPU using a special syringe as shown in the following  
figure. Apply quarter of scale (0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU chip. When  
silicon grease is already applied to the CPU, wipe them off with a close in advance.  
CAUTION: When installing the CPU, apply new grease on the top of the CPU chip.  
When installing the fin, make sure the bottom of the fin covers the top of the  
CPU.  
Figure 4-30 Applying new grease  
5. Install the fin.  
6. Place the CPU holder and secure it with the following screws in the order of the  
number marked on the holder.  
M2×4B BIND screw  
×3  
4-52  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.20 Speaker  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.20 Speaker  
Removing the Speaker  
To remove the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-31 and 4-32.  
1. Remove the following screws and peel the insulator.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
M2.5×4B  
×1 (upper left side)  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
Insulator  
Figure 4-31 Removing the speakers  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.20 Speaker  
2. Remove the following screw and cable holder.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Cable holder  
Figure 4-32 Removing the cable holder  
3. Remove both the speakers.  
Installing the Speaker  
To install the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-31 to 4-32.  
1. Set both the speakers.  
2. Install the cable holder and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
3. Secure the following screws and stick the insulator to fix the speakers.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
M2.5×4B  
×1 (upper left side)  
4-54  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.21 Fan  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.21 Fan  
Removing the Fan  
To remove the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-33.  
1. Remove the following screws securing the fan.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1 (lower right side)  
2. Remove the fan.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
Fan  
Figure4-33 Removing the fan  
Installing the Fan  
To install the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-33.  
1. Place the fan.  
2. Secure the fan with the following screw.  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.22 USB Board/DC-IN jack/Network jack  
4.22 USB Board/DC-IN jack/Network jack  
Removing the USB Board/DC-IN jack/Network jack  
To remove the USB board/DC-IN jack/network jack, follow the steps below and refer to  
figure 4-34.  
1. Remove the following screw securing the USB board.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
2. Disconnect the USB cable from the connector CN1 on the USB board.  
3. Peel off the acetate tape and remove the network jack from the slot.  
4. Disconnect the DC-IN jack cable from the connector CN1 on the power board and  
remove the DC-IN jack.  
DC-IN jack  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Network jack  
USB board  
USB cable  
Acetate tape  
Figure 4-34 Removing the USB board/DC-IN jack/network jack  
4-56  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.22 USB Board/DC-IN jack/Network jack  
4 Replacement Procedures  
Installing the USB Board/DC-IN jack/Network jack  
To install the USB board/DC-IN jack/network jack, follow the steps below and refer to the  
figure 4-34.  
1. Connect the DC-IN jack cable to the connector CN1 on the power board and Install  
the DC-IN jack.  
2. Install the network jack to the slot and stick the acetate tape.  
3. Connect the USB cable to the connector CN1 on the USB board.  
4. Place the USB board into the slot and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.23 RGB board/Power board  
4.23 RGB board/Power board  
Removing the RGB board/Power board  
To remove the RGB board/Power board, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-35 to  
4-37.  
1. Remove the following screws and battery plate.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw  
×3  
M2.5×6 Tapping  
Battery plate  
Figure 4-35 Removing the battery plate  
2. Remove the following screw and RGB board.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw ×1  
3. Disconnect the RGB cable from the connector CN3 on the RGB board.  
M2.5×6 Tapping  
RGB board  
RGB cable  
Figure 4-36 Removing the RGB board  
4-58  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.23 RGB board/Power board  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4. Remove the following screws and power board.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw  
×2  
M2.5×6 Tapping  
Wireless LAN cable (white)  
Battery cable  
Wireless LAN cable (black)  
Figure 4-37 Removing the power board  
5. Disconnect the wireless LAN cables from the connectors CN6 (white) and CN8  
(black) on the power board.  
6. Disconnect the battery cable from the connector CN4 on the power board.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.23 RGB board/Power board  
Installing the RGB board/Power board  
To install the RGB board/Power board, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-35 to 4-  
37.  
1. Connect the battery cable to the connector CN4 on the power board.  
2. Connect the wireless LAN cables to the connectors CN6 (white) and CN8 (black) on  
the power board.  
3. Place the power board and secure it with the following screws.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw  
×2  
4. Connect the RGB cable to the connector CN3 on the RGB board.  
5. Place the RGB board and secure it with the following screws.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw  
×1  
6. Place the battery plate and secure it with the following screws.  
M2.5×6 Tapping screw  
×3  
4-60  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.24 Display Mask  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.24 Display Mask  
Removing the Display Mask  
To remove the display mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-38.  
1. Remove the two mask seals at the lower part of the display mask.  
2. Remove the four rubber masks at the top of the display mask.  
3. Remove the following screws securing the display mask.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×3  
4. Release the latches on the display mask and remove the display mask.  
Mask seals  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
Rubber masks  
Mask seals  
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Figure 4-38 Removing the display mask  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.24 Display Mask  
Installing the Display Mask  
To install the display mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-38.  
1. Place the display mask on the LCD module.  
2. Engage the latches of the display mask.  
3. Secure the display mask with the following screws.  
M2.5×6B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×3  
4. Stick the four rubber masks at the top of the display mask.  
5. Stick the two mask seals at the lower part of the display mask.  
4-62  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.25 FL Inverter  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.25 FL Inverter  
Removing the FL Inverter  
To remove the FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-39.  
1. Remove the following screw securing the FL inverter.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
2. Peel the insulator on the FL inverter.  
3. Disconnect the FL cable under the insulator from the FL inverter.  
4. Disconnect the HV cable from the FL inverter.  
5. Remove the FL inverter.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
FL inverter  
Insulator  
FL cable  
HV cable  
Figure 4-39 Removing the FL inverter  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.25 FL Inverter  
Installing the FL Inverter  
To install the FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-39.  
1. Connect the FL cable and the HV cable to the FL inverter.  
2. Seat the FL inverter and stick the insulator on the FL inverter of the FL cable side.  
3. Secure the FL inverter with the following screw.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
4-64  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.26 LCD Module  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.26 LCD Module  
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to apply pressure to the ICs along the edge of LCD module.  
The ICs are easily damaged.  
2) For environmental reasons, do not throw away a malfunctioning LCD module  
(or FL). Please follow local ordinances or regulations for its disposal.  
Removing the LCD Module  
To remove the LCD Module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-40 and 4-41.  
1. Remove the four mask seals on the sides of the LCD module.  
2. Remove the following screws securing the LCD module.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
3. With the bottom edge of the LCD unit on the display cover, lift the top edge of the  
LCD unit.  
4. Remove the copper tape securing the LCD cable.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.26 LCD Module  
5. Disconnect the LCD cable from the connector on the back of the LCD and remove  
the LCD module.  
CAUTION: When removing the LCD cable, be careful not to damage the connector.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Mask seal  
Mask seal  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Mask seal  
Copper tape  
LCD cable  
Figure 4-40 Removing the LCD module (1)  
4-66  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.26 LCD Module  
4 Replacement Procedures  
6. Remove the following screws securing the two metal braces to the LCD module.  
M2×3C S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
M2×3C S-FLAT HEAD  
Metal brace  
Metal brace  
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD module (2)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.26 LCD Module  
Installing the LCD Module  
To install the LCD module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-40 and 4-41.  
1. Secure the two metal braces to the LCD module with the following screws.  
M2×3C S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
2. Set the LCD module on the display cover.  
3. Connect the LCD cable to the connector on the back of the LCD module. Stick the  
copper tape on the LCD cable.  
4. Seat the LCD module and secure it with the following screws.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×4  
5. Stick the four mask seals on the sides of the LCD module.  
4-68  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.27 Sensor/Switch Board  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.27 Sensor/Switch Board  
Removing the Sensor/Switch Board  
To remove the sensor/switch board, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered  
off, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-42.  
1. Remove the following screws securing the sensor/switch board.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
2. Remove the sensor/switch board.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Sensor/Switch board  
Figure 4-42 Removing the sensor/switch board  
3. Pull out the sensor/switch board cable.  
Installing the Sensor/Switch Board  
To install the sensor/switch board, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered  
off, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-42.  
1. Place the sensor/switch board in the slot and secure it with the following screw.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
2. Pass the sensor/switch board cable through the hole under the hinge cover.  
3. Arrange the sensor/switch board cable along with the guides.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
Removing the LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna  
To remove the LCD cable/wireless LAN antenna, follow the steps below and refer to figures  
4-43 to 4-49.  
1. Remove the following screw and LCD cable holder on the back.  
M2.5×5B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD  
LCD cable holder  
Figure 4-43 Removing the LCD cable holder  
2. Peel the insulator and remove the following screw and cable holder on the front.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
Insulator  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Cable holder  
Figure 4-44 Removing the cable holder  
4-70  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
4 Replacement Procedures  
3. Peel off the four acetate tapes fixing the wireless LAN antenna cable.  
4. Peel off the three copper sheets and the gasket fixing the wireless LAN antenna.  
5. Peel off both the wireless LAN antennas and pull out the cables through the hole  
under the hinge cap.  
Copper sheets  
Acetate tape  
Gasket  
Wireless LAN antenna  
Figure 4-45 Removing the wireless LAN antenna  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
6. Remove the hinge caps.  
7. Remove the following screws fixing the hinges on the display cover.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
Hinge cap  
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD  
Figure 4-46 Removing the hinge cap  
8. Remove the following screws and hinge (on the LCD cable side).  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×5B  
×1  
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Hinge  
Figure 4-47 Removing the hinge (LCD cable side)  
4-72  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
4 Replacement Procedures  
9. Pull out the LCD cable.  
10. Remove the following screws and circle plate.  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Circle plate  
Figure 4-48 Removing the circle plate  
11. Remove the following screws and hinge (on the other side).  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×5B  
×1  
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD  
Hinge  
Figure 4-49 Removing the hinge  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedures  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
Installing the LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna  
To install the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna/display cover/speaker, follow the  
steps below and refer to figures 4-43 to 4-50.  
1. Pass the LCD cable through the slot and guide.  
2. Set the hinge (on the opposite side of the LCD cable) and secure it with the following  
screws.  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×5B  
×1  
3. Place the circle plate and secure it with the following screws.  
M2×4B S-FLAT HEAD screw ×2  
4. Set the hinge (LCD cable side) and secure it with the following screws.  
M2×4B  
S-FLAT HEAD screw  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
M2.5×5B  
×1  
5. Secure the hinges on the display cover with the following screws.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×2  
6. Install the hinge cap (on the LCD cable side).  
7. Pass the wireless LAN antenna cables through the hole to the back.  
8. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables along the guides on the back and fix them  
with two acetate tapes.  
9. Secure the wireless LAN antenna cables with the four acetate tapes.  
4-74  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.28 LCD cable/Wireless LAN Antenna/Hinge  
4 Replacement Procedures  
10. Secure the wireless LAN antenna with the three copper sheets and the gasket.  
Standard for sticking position of copper sheets (right , left)  
Standard for sticking position of gasket  
Fit the copper sheet to the  
hole edge of the LCD cover.  
2.5 ± 2 mm  
The copper sheet shall not  
be over the edge of the wall  
of LCD cover.  
gasket  
Sticking side of gasket  
(wall of LCD cover)  
5 ± 4 mm  
Copper sheet  
Stick the gasket securely so  
that it fits the copper tape.  
Figure 4-50 Sticking the copper sheets and gasket  
11. Set the LCD cable holder on the back and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×5B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
12. Set the Cable holder on the front and secure it with the following screw and the  
insulator.  
M2.5×4B  
FLAT HEAD screw  
×1  
12. Place the hinge caps.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing  
the fluorescent lamp is different for each LCD module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.  
Type  
Part No.  
Supplier  
TMD  
Section  
Page  
15.4-inch WXGA  
G33C0001H110  
4.29.1  
4-76  
G33C0001F110  
G33C0001D110  
G33C0001G110  
G33C0001E110  
LG.Philips  
Samsung  
LG.Philips  
Samsung  
4.29.2  
4.29.3  
4.29.2  
4.29.3  
4-88  
4-95  
4-88  
4-95  
15.4-inch WXGA  
(CSV)  
NOTE: - When working with a LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.  
- Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean  
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may  
scratch the LCD surface.  
- Use an anti-static or protective sheet.  
- When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent  
soiling or scratching the LCD panel.  
- Be careful when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.  
- Be careful not to soil or deform the lamp reflector.  
- Make sure that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting or  
disconnecting cables and connectors.  
4-76  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29.1 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp  
CAUTION: When replacing the fluorescent lamp, wear finger covers or gloves to avoid  
contaminating or damaging the LCD panel. Be careful not to let dust or other foreign  
substance into the module.  
Disassembling the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp  
To disassemble the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and  
refer to figures 4-51 to 4-55.  
1. Removing tapes and insulation sheets from LCD module  
1) Place the LCD module face down on a flat table that has no alien substance on  
it. Make sure there is no dust on the desk to avoid scratching the surface of the  
LCD module. Place a protective sheet (such as soft cloth) on the surface.  
2) Remove the fixing tape for the FL cable, two tapes at the side of lamp, X-PCB  
insulation sheet and Y-PCB insulation sheet from the LCD module in order as  
shown in the figure below.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to give any damage to the TAB.  
2) The X-PCB insulation sheet should be left attached to the bezel, as it  
will be recycled.  
3) The Y-PCB insulation sheet shall not be disposed after removed, as it  
will be recycled.  
(3) X-PCB insulation sheet  
Product Label  
Backlight Serial Number Label  
Destruction Label  
Caution Label  
(4) Y-PCB insulation sheet  
Fixing tape for  
(2) Bezel tape  
FL cable  
Figure 4-51 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1)  
4-78  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
2. Removing screws  
1) Spread out the insulation sheet without detaching from the side of bezel.  
2) Remove the screws (left side, right side) in order as shown in the figure below.  
NOTE: Use a Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit to remove the screws.  
Product Label  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
Backlight Serial Number Label  
(1)  
(1)  
Destruction Label  
Caution Label  
(2)  
Figure 4-52 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
3. Removing bezel  
1) Turn the LCD module face up with the insulation sheets on it.  
2) Release the latches of the bezel and frame. (five points on upper side, two  
points lower side)  
3) Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the bottom of the side of bezel, and  
remove the bezel.  
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to damage the TAB when releasing the upper latches.  
2) When removing the bezel, be sure to remove the double-sided  
adhesive tapes on the lower side of bezel slowly so as not to break  
the cell. Be careful not to deform the bezel.  
Bezel  
Backlight unit  
Figure 4-53 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3)  
4-80  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4. Spreading out PCB  
1) Spread out the X-PCB and Y-PCB horizontally in order.  
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the TAB.  
(1) Spread out the X-  
PCB from the back.  
(2) Spread out the Y-  
PCB from the back.  
Figure 4-54 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
5. Removing PCB-ASSY cell  
1) Remove the PCB-ASSY cell from the backlight unit.  
2) Remove the double-sided adhesive tape from the back of the cell.  
NOTE: 1) Remove the tape slowly not to break the cell. The cell and frame are  
glued by double-sided adhesive tape.  
2) Be careful not to remove the light shielding tapes from the upper left  
and right sides of the cell.  
PCB-ASSY cell  
Remove the cell by  
peeling off the double-  
sided adhesive tape.  
Backlight unit  
Figure 4-55 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5)  
4-82  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
Assembling the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp  
To assemble the 15.4-inch WXGA TMD fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer  
to figures 4-56 to 4-61.  
1. Checking backlight  
1) Check the following items shown in the figure below.  
Fixing tape for sheet  
Make sure the sheet does  
not come off the frame.  
Figure 4-56 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (6)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
2. Assembling PCB-ASSY cell  
1) Remove the release paper of the double-sided tape at the upper of the  
backlight unit.  
2) Light up the backlight.  
3) Make sure there is no dust, alien substance or scratch on the backlight. Then  
make sure there is nothing wrong with the back of cell, install the PCB-ASSY  
cell to the backlight unit.  
NOTE: 1) When installing the PCB-ASSY cell, fit it to the left bottom corner of  
the backlight unit.  
2) Be careful not to damage the TAB.  
Cell with PCB  
Remove the release  
paper of the double-  
sided adhesive tape.  
Backlight unit  
Fit to the left  
bottom corner.  
Figure 4-57 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (7)  
4-84  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
3. Folding and temporary fixing of TAB/PCB  
1) Fold the X-TAB (X-PCB) and Y-TAB (Y-PCB) to the back of backlight unit.  
2) Hook the X-PCB on the three latches on the back of frame.  
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the TAB.  
(1) Fold the X-PCB to the back.  
(2) Fold the Y-PCB  
to the back.  
Insert the FPC into the connector.  
The PCB shall be hooked on the  
three latches of the frame.  
The PCB shall not be  
installed over the frame.  
Figure 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (8)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4. Setting bezel  
1) Hook the bezel on the five latches of the frame from the upper side.  
NOTE:1) Make sure the GND-CU on the left side and lamp reflector shall be  
inside the bezel.  
2) Be careful not to damage the TAB.  
3) Make sure the five latches of the upper side of bezel are hooked on.  
(1) Install the bezel from the  
TAB side. Be careful not to  
damage the TAB. Hook the  
bezel on the five latches.  
Make sure the gum projection  
for protecting the cable is not  
outside th ebezel.  
The cable shall not be  
outside the bezel.  
Make sure the fold of reflector  
is not outside the bezel.  
(2) Align the bezel with the  
lamp side of the backlight unit.  
Make sure the gum projection  
for protecting the cable is not  
outside th ebezel.  
Figure 4-59 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (9)  
4-86  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
5. Fixing PCBs and bezel with screws  
1) Tighten the left side with the screws in order shown in the figure below.  
2) Tighten the right side with the screws in order shown in the figure below.  
NOTE:1) Tighten the screws in order. Make sure there is no floating of screw.  
2) The screw tightening torque shall be 0.147mNm (1.5kgfcm).  
3) Use a Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit.  
(1)  
Tighten the eight screws.  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
Figure 4-60 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (10)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
6. Sticking tapes and insulation sheets  
1) Stick the Y-PCB insulation sheet and X-PCB insulation sheet in order.  
2) Stick the two bezel tapes on the lower side (lamp side).  
3) Stick the fixing tape for FL cable.  
NOTE: Be careful not to damage to the TAB or the pulling-out part of lamp  
cable when sticking the tapes and insulation sheets.  
Stick the X-PCB  
Stick the Y-PCB  
insulation sheet.  
insulation sheet.  
Stick the insulation sheet  
without any flexure.  
Stick the insulation sheet  
without any flexure.  
Bezel tape  
Standard for sticking bezel  
tape. Stick the tape between  
the mark-off lines.  
Stick the bezel tape while pressing  
not to cause floating of bezel.  
Standard for fixing  
tape for FL cable.  
Fixing tape for FL cable  
Standard for sticking bezel  
tape. Stick the tape between  
the mark-off lines.  
Standard for sticking bezel  
tape. Stick the tape between  
the mark-off lines.  
Figure 4-61 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (11)  
4-88  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29.2 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA LG.Philips Fluorescent Lamp  
Disassembly of outside tape / Cover shield  
To disassemble the 15.4-inch WXGA LG.Philips fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below  
and refer to figures 4-62 to 4-65.  
1. Disassembly of Tape adhesive used for B/L Wire fixing  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on B/L Wire.  
2. Disassembly of Tape adhesive used for B/L Wire fixing  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on Gate COF.  
3. Disassembly of Cover shield (S)  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on Source PCB. Usage of gloves  
with anti-electric discharge coating is recommended, to eliminate possible damage  
on circuits occurred by ESC.  
4. Disassembly of Tape shield and Tape Adhesive used for Top case fixing  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on Top case during this process.  
Figure 4-62 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
Disassembly of Top case  
1. Disassembly of Top Case  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on Top Case and Gate COF.  
Figure 4-63 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2)  
4-90  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
Disassembly of Source PCB and Gate PCB  
1. Disassembly of Source PCB  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on PCB and TCP during  
removing double tape.  
2. Disassembly of Gate PCB  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on PCB and TCP during  
removing double tape.  
Figure 4-64 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
Disassembly of Board Ass’y, Tape Adhesive, Light guide,Cover Ass’y bottom (L)  
1. Disassembly of Board Ass’y  
CAUTION: This process should be made in Clean room with no scratch nor  
particle on Polarizer and B/L Ass’y.  
2. Disassembly of Tape Adhesive used for Sheets fixing (5Point).  
3. Disassembly of Sheets, Light guide  
CAUTION: No penetration of foreign body is indispensable with no scratch on the  
surface of each sheet.  
4. Disassembly of Screw and Cover bottom  
CAUTION: Maximum value of torque with Screw should be below 3.0kgf·cm  
pressure or stress should not be given on Lamp Housing during detaching double  
tape.  
5. Disassembly of Lamp Ass’y  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on Lamp Ass’y during detaching  
double tape.  
Figure 4-65 Replacing LG. LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4)  
4-92  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
Assembly of Cover bottom, Sheets, Light guide, Tape Adhesive, Double Tape and  
Board Ass’y.  
To assemble the 15.4-inch WXGA LG.Philips fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and  
refer to figures 4-66 to 4-69.  
1. Detach a protect film from Double Tape at the Lamp Ass’y.  
2. Attach the Lamp Ass’y to the Support Main.  
3. Detach a protect film from Double Tape at the inside of Cover Bottom.  
4. Assemble the Cover Bottom and Screw to the Support Main.  
CAUTION: Maximum value of torque with Screw should be below 3.0kgf·cm.  
5. Assembly of Light Guide and Sheets.(Reflector Sheet fixing with one Double Tapes)  
CAUTION: No penetration of foreign body is indispensable with no scratch on the  
surface of each.  
6. Assembly of Tape adhesive used for Sheets fixing (5Point)  
7. Assembly of Board Ass’y  
CAUTION: Pressure or stress should not be given on PCB and TCP.  
Figure 4-66 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
Assembly of Source PCB  
1. Assembly of Source PCB  
CAUTION: Stress should not be given on TCP during assembling S/M hook.  
Figure 4-67 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (6)  
4-94  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
Assembly of Cover Ass’y, Screw, Top Case  
1. Assembly of Top Case  
CAUTION: Pressure should not be given on Gate COF.  
Figure 4-68 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (7)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
Assembly of outside Tape and Cover shield  
1. Assembly of Tape shield and Tape Adhesive used for Top case fixing  
NOTE: Pressure or stress should not be given on Top case during this process.  
2. Assembly of Cover shield (S)  
NOTE: Pressure or stress should not be given on control PCB.  
Usage of gloves with anti-electric discharge coating is recommended to eliminate  
possible damage on circuits occurred by ESC.  
3. Assembly of Cover shield (G)  
NOTE: Pressure or stress should not be given on Gate COF.  
4. Assembly of Tape adhesive used for B/L Wire fixing  
NOTE: Pressure or stress should not be given on B/L wire.  
Figure 4-69 Replacing LG.Philips fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (8)  
4-96  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29.3 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp  
Disassembling the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp  
To disassemble the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and  
refer to figures4-70 to 4-74.  
1. Remove the PCB cover and COF cover.  
2. Remove the lamp wire tape and Al tape.  
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the COF of S/D or G/D ICs.  
PCB cover  
COF cover  
Lamp wire tape  
Al tape  
Figure 4-70 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
3. Remove the two screws from the PCB.  
Screw  
Screw  
PCB  
Figure 4-71 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2)  
4. Remove the four screws from the top chassis.  
Screw  
Screw  
Screw  
Screw  
Figure 4-72 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3)  
4-98  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
4 Replacement Procedure  
5. Remove the four bottom hooks and four side hooks (left and right) in the order. Then  
remove the top chassis from the mold frame.  
(2) S ide hook  
(1) B ottom hook  
Figure 4-73 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4)  
6. Remove the panel assembly from the BLU.  
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the COF of S/D or G/D ICs.  
Panel assembly  
BLU  
Figure 4-74 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (5)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Replacement Procedure  
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp  
7. The assembly procedure of the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung fluorescent lamp is the  
reverse of the above disassembly procedure.  
4-100  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
App-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix  
Contents  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module.......................................................................... A-1  
Appendix B Board Layout .................................................................................................B-1  
B.1  
B.2  
B.3  
B.4  
System Board (FMSSY* 32M) Front View...............................................................1  
System Board (FMSSY* 32M) Back View ...............................................................3  
System Board (FMSMP* 64M) Front View..............................................................5  
System Board (FMSMP* 64M) Back View ..............................................................7  
Appendix C Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1  
C.1  
IS1400/1401 Memory connector (200-pin)...........................................................C-1  
PJ1800 HDD I/F connector (44-pin).....................................................................C-4  
PJ1820 CD-ROM I/F connector (50-pin)..............................................................C-5  
PJ2100 PC card I/F connector (68-pin).................................................................C-6  
IS2101 SD card I/F connector (12-pin).................................................................C-7  
PJ2200 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) ............................................................C-8  
PJ3000 MDC I/F connector (30-pin) ..................................................................C-10  
PJ3200 Keyboard I/F connector (34-pin)............................................................C-11  
PJ3201 PAD I/F connector (8-pin)......................................................................C-11  
PJ3400 Parallel I/F Connector (25-pin) ..............................................................C-12  
PJ4100 Network I/F connector (14-pin)..............................................................C-12  
PJ4200 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)......................................................................C-13  
PJ5600 LCD connector (41-pin) .........................................................................C-13  
PJ5621 CRT I/F connector (20-pin)....................................................................C-14  
PJ6001 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin) ..................................................C-14  
PJ6004 Speaker Connector (left) (2-pin) ............................................................C-14  
PJ6003 Speaker Connector (right) (3-pin) ..........................................................C-15  
PJ7000 CD key I/F connector (18-pin) ...............................................................C-15  
PJ7001 Power switch I/F connector (15-pin)......................................................C-16  
PJ7002 Sound connector PCB I/F connector (20-pin)........................................C-16  
PJ7004 Panel switch I/F connector (2-pin) .........................................................C-17  
PJ8810 1st Battery connector (7-pin)..................................................................C-17  
C.2  
C.3  
C.4  
C.5  
C.6  
C.7  
C.8  
C.9  
C.10  
C.11  
C.12  
C.13  
C.14  
C.15  
C.16  
C.17  
C.18  
C.19  
C.20  
C.21  
C.22  
App-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
C.23  
C.24  
C.25  
C.26  
C.27  
C.28  
PJ8490 RTC Battery Connector (3-pin)..............................................................C-17  
PJ8770 FAN connector (3-pin) ...........................................................................C-17  
PJ2000 Debugging port (4-pin)...........................................................................C-18  
PJ7003 USB connector PCB I/F connector (4-pin) ............................................C-19  
PJ7003 USB connector PCB I/F connector 1 (4-pin) .........................................C-19  
PJ7005 USB connector PCB I/F connector (2-pin) ............................................C-19  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes................................................................ D-1  
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1  
E.1  
E.2  
United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard...........................................................................E-1  
United States (US) Keyboard.................................................................................E-1  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ...........................................................................................F-1  
F.1  
F.2  
Parallel Port Wraparound Connector .....................................................................F-1  
LAN Loopback Connector.....................................................................................F-2  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures ...........................................................................G-1  
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures......................................................................H-1  
Appendix I Reliability .........................................................................................................I-1  
Appendix J SETUP............................................................................................................. J-1  
App-iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Figures  
Figure B-1 System board (FMSSY* 32M) layout (front) ........................................................1  
Figure B-2 System board (FMSSY* 32M) layout (back).........................................................3  
Figure B-3 System board (FMSMP* 64M) layout (front)........................................................5  
Figure B-4 System board (FMSMP* 64M) layout (back)........................................................7  
Figure E-1 UK keyboard.......................................................................................................E-1  
Figure E-2 US keyboard .......................................................................................................E-1  
Figure F-1 Parallel port wraparound connector....................................................................F-1  
Figure F-2 LAN loopback connector....................................................................................F-1  
Figure J-1 Main menu............................................................................................................J-2  
App-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Tables  
Table B-1 System board (FMSSY* 32M) ICs and connectors (front).....................................2  
Table B-2 System board (FMSSY* 32M) ICs and connectors (back) .....................................4  
Table B-3 System board (FMSMP* 64M) ICs and connectors (front) ....................................6  
Table B-4 System board (FMSMP* 64M) ICs and connectors (back).....................................8  
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-pin)...............................................................................C-1  
Table C-2 HDD I/F connector (44-pin) ................................................................................C-4  
Table C-3 CD-ROM I/F connector (50-pin).........................................................................C-5  
Table C-4 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)............................................................................C-6  
Table C-5 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)............................................................................C-7  
Table C-6 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin)........................................................................C-8  
Table C-7 MDC I/F connector (300-pin)............................................................................C-10  
Table C-8 Keyboard I/F connector (34-pin).......................................................................C-11  
Table C-9 PAD I/F connector (8-pin).................................................................................C-11  
Table C-10 Parallel I/F Connector (25-pin)........................................................................C-12  
Table C-11 Network I/F connector (14-pin).......................................................................C-12  
Table C-12 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)...............................................................................C-13  
Table C-13 LCD connector (41-pin) ..................................................................................C-13  
Table C-14 CRT I/F connector (20-pin).............................................................................C-14  
Table C-15 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin) ...........................................................C-14  
Table C-16 Speaker Connector (left) (2-pin)......................................................................C-14  
Table C-17 Speaker Connector (right) (3-pin) ...................................................................C-15  
Table C-18 CD key I/F connector (18-pin) ........................................................................C-15  
Table C-19 Power switch I/F connector (15-pin)...............................................................C-16  
Table C-20 Sound connector PCB I/F connector (20-pin) .................................................C-16  
Table C-21 Panel switch I/F connector (2-pin) ..................................................................C-17  
Table C-22 1st Battery connector (7-pin)...........................................................................C-17  
Table C-23 PJ8490 RTC Battery Connector (3-pin) ..........................................................C-17  
App-vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Table C-24 FAN connector (3-pin) ....................................................................................C-17  
Table C-25 Debugging port (4-pin)....................................................................................C-18  
Table C-26 USB connector PCB I/F connector (4-pin)......................................................C-19  
Table C-27 USB connector PCB I/F connector 1 (4-pin)...................................................C-19  
Table C-28 USB connector PCB I/F connector 2 (2-pin)...................................................C-19  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) ............................................................................... D-1  
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key ............................................................................ D-5  
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode ............................................................................ D-6  
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key ...................................................................................... D-6  
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode ............................................................................... D-7  
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code......................................................................................... D-7  
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code......................................................................................... D-8  
Table I-1  
MTBF..............................................................................................................I-1  
App-vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
App-viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
Appendices  
Appendix A  
P
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
Precautions for handling the LCD module  
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the  
following precautions when handling the LCD module:  
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is  
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.  
2. For 14.4 inch LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left  
side of the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before  
securing the module with four screws.  
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.  
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,  
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.  
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to  
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.  
CRT  
Cleaner  
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change  
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.  
A-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
Appendices  
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,  
which could cause breakage or cracks.  
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from  
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the  
module.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long  
periods.  
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the  
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.  
A-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
Appendices  
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.  
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin  
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can  
damage the panel’s polarization.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
A-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Appendices  
Appendix B Board Layout  
B.1 System Board (FMSSY* 32M) Front View  
(V)  
(R)  
(S)  
(T)  
(A)  
(U)  
(B)  
(Q)  
(P)  
(W)  
(C)  
(D)  
(O)  
(N)  
(M)  
(L)  
(K)  
(J)  
(I)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
Figure B-1 System board (FMSSY* 32M) layout (front)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Table B-1 System board (FMSSY* 32M) ICs and connectors (front)  
Mark  
Number  
PJ2100  
PJ7000  
PJ6001  
PJ8490  
PJ7002  
PJ1800  
PJ3200  
PJ6003  
PJ4100  
PJ7003  
PJ6004  
PJ8810  
PJ3201  
PJ7004  
PJ7001  
PJ5621  
PJ8770  
PJ2000  
IC3200  
IC2000  
IC1600  
IC3001  
PJ5600  
Name  
PC card I/F connector  
CD key I/F connector  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
(I)  
Internal microphone I/F connector  
RTC battery connector  
Sound connector PCB I/F connector  
HDD I/F connector  
Keyboard I/F connector  
Speaker connector (right)  
Network I/F connector  
USB connector PCB I/F connector  
Speaker connector (left)  
1st battery connector  
PAD I/F connector  
(J)  
(K)  
(L)  
(M)  
(N)  
(0)  
(P)  
(Q)  
(R)  
(S)  
(T)  
(U)  
(V)  
(W)  
Panel switch I/F connector  
Power switch I/F connector  
CRT I/F connector  
FAN connector  
Debugging port  
EC/KBC  
YEBISUSS  
ICH4-M  
FWH  
LCD I/F connector  
B-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Appendices  
B.2 System Board (FMSSY* 32M) Back View  
(E)  
(A)  
(J)  
(H)  
(D)  
(G)  
(F)  
(I)  
(B)  
(C)  
Figure B-2 System board (FMSSY* 32M) layout (back)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Table B-2 System board (FMSSY* 32M) ICs and connectors (back)  
Mark  
Number  
PJ3400  
PJ3000  
PJ1820  
PJ2200  
PJ4200  
IC5000  
IC1200  
IS1100  
IC6008  
IS2101  
Name  
Parallel I/F connector  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
(I)  
MDC I/F connector  
CD-ROM I/F connector  
Mini PCI I/F connector  
1394 I/F connector  
NV34  
MCH-M  
CPU  
AN12940  
(J)  
SD card I/F connector  
B-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Appendices  
B.3 System Board (FMSMP* 64M) Front View  
(V)  
(R)  
(S)  
(T)  
(A)  
(U)  
(B)  
(Q)  
(P)  
(W)  
(O)  
(X)  
(C)  
(D)  
(N)  
(M)  
(L)  
(K)  
(J)  
(I)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
Figure B-3 System board (FMSMP* 64M) layout (front)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Table B-3 System board (FMSMP* 64M) ICs and connectors (front)  
Mark  
Number  
PJ2100  
PJ7000  
PJ6001  
PJ8490  
PJ7002  
PJ1800  
PJ3200  
PJ6003  
PJ4100  
PJ7003  
PJ6004  
PJ8810  
PJ3201  
PJ7004  
PJ7001  
PJ5621  
PJ8770  
PJ2000  
IC3200  
IC2000  
IC1600  
IC3001  
PJ5600  
PJ7005  
Name  
PC card I/F connector  
CD key I/F connector  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
(I)  
Internal microphone I/F connector  
RTC battery connector  
Sound connector PCB I/F connector  
HDD I/F connector  
Keyboard I/F connector  
Speaker connector (right)  
Network I/F connector  
USB connector PCB I/F connector 1  
Speaker connector (left)  
1st battery connector  
PAD I/F connector  
(J)  
(K)  
(L)  
(M)  
(N)  
(0)  
(P)  
(Q)  
(R)  
(S)  
(T)  
(U)  
(V)  
(W)  
(X)  
Panel switch I/F connector  
Power switch I/F connector  
CRT I/F connector  
FAN connector  
Debugging port  
EC/KBC  
YEBISUSS  
ICH4-M  
FWH  
LCD I/F connector  
USB connector PCB I/F connector 2  
B-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Appendices  
B.4 System Board (FMSMP* 64M) Back View  
(E)  
(A)  
(J)  
(H)  
(D)  
(G)  
(F)  
(I)  
(B)  
(C)  
Figure B-4 System board (FMSMP* 64M) layout (back)  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix B Board Layout  
Table B-4 System board (FMSMP* 64M) ICs and connectors (back)  
Mark  
Number  
PJ3400  
PJ3000  
PJ1820  
PJ2200  
PJ4200  
IC5000  
IC1200  
IS1100  
IC6008  
IS2101  
Name  
Parallel I/F connector  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(H)  
(I)  
MDC I/F connector  
CD-ROM I/F connector  
Mini PCI I/F connector  
1394 I/F connector  
NV64  
MCH-M  
CPU  
AN12940  
(J)  
SD card I/F connector  
B-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
System Board (common to FMSSY* 32M, FMSMP* 64M)  
C.1 IS1400/1401 Memory connector (200-pin)  
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-pin)(1/4)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
VREF  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
-
-
2
VREF  
-
-
3
GND  
4
GND  
5
SDQ00R-B2P  
SDQ04R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
6
SDQ06R-B2P  
SDQ01R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
SDQS0R-B2P  
SDQ05R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
-
SDQ02R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
-
SDQ03R-B2P  
SDQ13R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ07R-B2P  
SDQ12R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
SDQ09R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ08R-B2P  
SDQS1R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
I/O  
-
GND  
-
SDQ14R-B2P  
SDQ15R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ11R-B2P  
SDQ10R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
2R5-B2V  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SCK0-B2P  
SCK0-B2N  
GND  
I
-
I
-
-
GND  
-
SDQ20R-B2P  
SDQ16R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ22R-B2P  
SDQ21R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQS2R-B2P  
SDQ17R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
-
SDQ19R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
-
SDQ18R-B2P  
I/O  
SDQ23R-B2P  
I/O  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-pin)(2/4)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
55  
57  
SDQ25R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
56  
58  
SDQ29R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
-
-
59  
SDQ24R-B2P  
SDQS3R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
60  
SDQ28R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
61  
I/O  
62  
-
63  
-
64  
GND  
-
65  
SDQ26R-B2P  
SDQ27R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
66  
SDQ30R-B2P  
SDQ31R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
67  
I/O  
68  
I/O  
69  
-
70  
-
71  
SCB5A-B2P  
SCB4A-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
72  
SCB0A-B2P  
SCB1A-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
73  
I/O  
74  
I/O  
75  
-
76  
-
77  
SDQS8A-B2P  
SCB2A-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
78  
GND  
-
79  
I/O  
80  
SCB3A-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
81  
-
I/O  
-
82  
-
I/O  
-
83  
SCB6A-B2P  
N.C  
84  
SCB7A-B2P  
N.C  
85  
86  
87  
GND  
-
88  
GND  
-
89  
2R5-B2V  
-
90  
GND  
-
91  
GND  
-
92  
2R5-B2V  
-
93  
2R5-B2V  
-
94  
2R5-B2V  
-
95  
SCKE1-B2P  
N.C  
I
96  
SCKEO-B2P  
N.C  
I
97  
-
98  
-
99  
SMA12R-B2P  
SMA09R-B2P  
GND  
I
100  
102  
104  
106  
108  
110  
112  
114  
116  
118  
120  
122  
124  
SMA11R-B2P  
SMA08R-B2P  
GND  
I
101  
103  
105  
107  
109  
111  
113  
115  
117  
119  
121  
123  
I
I
-
-
SMA07R-B2P  
SMA05R-B2P  
SMA03R-B2P  
SMA01R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I
SMA06R-B2P  
SMA04R-B2P  
SMA02R-B2P  
SMA00R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
SMA10R-B2P  
SBS0R-B2P  
SWER-B2N  
SCS0-B2N  
N.C  
I
SBS1R-B2P  
SRASR-B2N  
SCASR-B2N  
SCS1-B2N  
N.C  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
C-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-pin)(3/4)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
125  
127  
129  
131  
133  
135  
137  
139  
141  
143  
145  
147  
149  
151  
153  
155  
157  
159  
161  
163  
165  
167  
169  
171  
173  
175  
177  
179  
181  
183  
185  
187  
189  
191  
193  
-
126  
128  
130  
132  
134  
136  
138  
140  
142  
144  
146  
148  
150  
152  
154  
156  
158  
160  
162  
164  
166  
168  
170  
172  
174  
176  
178  
180  
182  
184  
186  
188  
190  
192  
194  
-
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ37R-B2P  
SDQ36R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ33R-B2P  
SDQ32R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
SDQS4R-B2P  
SDQ34R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
GND  
-
SDQ39R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
-
SDQ38R-B2P  
SDQ44R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ35R-B2P  
SDQ41R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ45R-B2P  
SDQS5R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ40R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
-
GND  
-
SDQ46R-B2P  
SDQ42R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ47R-B2P  
SDQ43R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
2R5-B2V  
-
SCK1-B2N  
SCK1-B2P  
GND  
I
GND  
-
I
GND  
-
-
SDQ48R-B2P  
SDQ53R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ54R-B2P  
SDQ49R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQS6R-B2P  
SDQ51-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
GND  
-
SDQ50R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
-
SDQ52R-B2P  
SDQ60R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ55R-B2P  
SDQ57R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ56R-B2P  
SDQS7R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ61R-B2P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
GND  
SDQ58R-B2P  
SDQ59R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SDQ63R-B2P  
SDQ62R-B2P  
2R5-B2V  
I/O  
I/O  
-
SMBDAT-P3P  
I/O  
GND  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-pin)(4/4)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
195  
197  
199  
SMBCLK-P3P  
P3V  
I/O  
196  
198  
200  
-
-
-
-
-
GND  
N.C  
N.C  
C.2  
PJ1800 HDD I/F connector (44-pin)  
Table C-2 HDD I/F connector (44-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
IDRSTA-P5N  
PDD07-P3P  
PDD06-P3P  
PDD05-P3P  
PDD04-P3P  
PDD03-P3P  
PDD02-P3P  
PDD01-P3P  
PDD00-P3P  
GND  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
GND  
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
3
4
PDD08-P3P  
PDD09-P3P  
PDD10-P3P  
PDD11-P3P  
PDD12-P3P  
PDD13-P3P  
PDD14-P3P  
PDD15-P3P  
N.C  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
PDDREQ-P3P  
PDIOW-P3N  
PDIOR-P3N  
PIORDY-P3P  
PDDACK-P3N  
PDIRQ-P3P  
PDA1-P3P  
PDA0-P3P  
PDCS1-P3N  
HDDLED-P5N  
P5V  
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
PDA2-P3P  
PDCS3-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
P5V  
-
GND  
N.C  
-
C-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C.3  
PJ1820 CD-ROM I/F connector (50-pin)  
Table C-3 CD-ROM I/F connector (50-pin)  
Pin No.  
1
Signal name  
CDAUDL-EXP  
CD-GND  
I/O  
I
Pin No.  
2
Signal name  
CDAUDR-EXP  
N.C  
I/O  
I
3
I
4
-
5
IDRSTB-E5N  
SDD07-E5P  
SDD06-E5P  
SDD05-E5P  
SDD04-E5P  
SDD03-E5P  
SDD02-E5P  
SDD01-E5P  
SDD00-E5P  
GND  
O
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
-
6
SDD08-E5P  
SDD09-E5P  
SDD10-E5P  
SDD11-E5P  
SDD12-E5P  
SDD13-E5P  
SDD14-E5P  
SDD15-E5P  
SDDREQ-E5P  
SDIOR-E3N  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
O
-
SDIOW-E3N  
SIORDY-E5P  
IRQ15-E5P  
SDA1-E3P  
SDA0-E3P  
SDCS1-E3N  
SDASP-E5N  
CD-E5V  
O
I
SDDACK-E3N  
N.C  
O
-
I
O
O
O
I/O  
I
N.C  
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
SDA2-E3P  
SDCS3-E3N  
CD-E5V  
CD-E5V  
CD-E5V  
I
CD-E5V  
GND  
-
GND  
GND  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
GND  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.4  
PJ2100 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)  
Table C-4 PC card I/F connector (68-pin) (1/2)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
-
2
ACAD00-BYP  
ACAD03-BYP  
ACAD07-BYP  
ACAD09-BYP  
ACAD12-BYP  
ACCBE1-BYN  
ACRERR-BYN  
ACTNT-BYN  
MCVPPA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
-
3
ACAD01-BYP  
ACAD05-BYP  
ACCBEO-BYP  
ACAD11-BYP  
ACAD14-BYP  
ACPAB-BYP  
ACGNT-BYN  
MCVCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
-
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
ACCLK-BYP  
ACCBE2-BYN  
ACAD20-BYP  
ACAD22-BYP  
ACAD24-BYP  
ACAD25-BYP  
ACAD29-BYP  
ACCLKR-BYN  
GND  
ACTBDY-BYN  
ACAD18-BYP  
ACAD21-BYP  
ACAD23-BYP  
ACAD25-BYP  
ACAD27-BYP  
ACD02-BYP  
GND  
ACCD1-B3N  
ACAD04-BYP  
ACD14-BYP  
ACAD10-BYP  
ACAD13-BYP  
ACAD16-BYP  
ACLOCK-BYN  
ACDEVS-BYN  
MCVPPA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
ACAD02-BYP  
ACAD06-BYP  
ACAD08-BYP  
ACVS1-B3P  
ACAD15-BYP  
ACA18-BYP  
ACSTOP-BYN  
MCVCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
ACTRDY-BYN  
ACAD17-BYP  
ACYS2-B3P  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
ACFRAM-BYN  
ACAD19-BYP  
ACRST-BYN  
C-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
Table C- PC card I/F connector (68-pin) (2/2)  
Pin No.  
59  
Signal name  
ACSERR-BYN  
ACCBE3-BYN  
ACSTSC-BYP  
ACAD30-BYP  
ACCD2-B3N  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
Pin No.  
60  
Signal name  
ACREQ-BYN  
ACAUDI-BYP  
ACAD28-BYP  
ACAD31-BYP  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I
61  
62  
63  
64  
I/O  
I/O  
-
65  
I/O  
I
66  
67  
68  
C.5  
IS2101 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)  
Table C-5 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
SDAT3-B3P  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
-
Pin No.  
Signal name  
SDCMD-B3P  
SD-B3V  
I/O  
1
3
2
4
I/O  
-
5
SDCLK-B3P  
SDAT0-B3P  
SDAT2-B3P  
GND  
O
6
GND  
-
I/O  
I
7
I/O  
I/O  
-
8
SDAT1-B3P  
SDCD-B3N  
SDWP-B3P  
9
10  
12  
11  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.6  
PJ2200 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin)  
Table C-6 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) (1/2)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
N.C.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
2
N.C.  
-
-
3
N.C.  
4
N.C.  
5
N.C.  
6
N.C.  
-
7
N.C.  
8
N.C.  
-
9
N.C.  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
62  
N.C.  
-
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
61  
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
WLON-S3N  
GND  
N.C.  
-
-
I
N.C.  
-
PIRQA-P3N  
P3V  
P5V  
-
-
-
-
I
PIRQD-P3N  
N.C.  
O
-
N.C.  
GND  
B3V  
-
X33MPC-P3P  
GND  
PCIRST-P3N  
P3V  
O
-
-
I
PREQ2-P3N  
P3V  
PGNT2-P3N  
GND  
O
-
-
I
AD31-P3P  
AD29-P3P  
GND  
PME-S3N  
N.C.  
O
-
I
-
I
AD30-P3P  
P3V  
O
-
AD27-P3P  
AD25-P3P  
N.C.  
I
AD28-P3P  
AD26-P3P  
AD24-P3P  
AD26-P3P  
GND  
O
O
O
O
-
-
I
CBE3-P3N  
AD23-P3P  
GND  
I
-
I
AD21-P3P  
AD19-P3P  
GND  
AD22-P3P  
AD20-P3P  
PAR-P3P  
AD18-P3P  
AD16-P3P  
GND  
O
O
O
O
O
-
I
-
I
AD17-P3P  
CBE2-P3N  
IRDY-P3N  
I
I
C-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
Table C-6 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) (2/2)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
63  
65  
P3V  
-
I
64  
66  
FRAME-P3N  
TRDY-P3N  
STOP-P3N  
P3V  
O
O
0
-
CLKRUN-P3N  
SERR-P3N  
GND  
67  
I
68  
69  
-
I
70  
71  
PERR-P3N  
CBE1-P3N  
AD14-P3P  
GND  
72  
DEVSEL-P3N  
GND  
0
-
73  
I
74  
75  
I
76  
AD15-P3P  
AD13-P3P  
AD11-P3P  
GND  
O
O
O
-
77  
-
I
78  
79  
AD12-P3P  
AD10-P3P  
GND  
80  
81  
I
82  
83  
-
I
84  
AD09-P3P  
CBE0-P3N  
P3V  
O
O
-
85  
AD08-P3P  
AD07-P3P  
P3V  
86  
87  
I
88  
89  
-
I
90  
AD06-P3P  
AD04-P3P  
AD02-P3P  
AD00-P3P  
N.C.  
O
O
O
O
-
91  
AD05-P3P  
N.C.  
92  
93  
-
I
94  
95  
AD03-P3P  
P5V  
96  
97  
-
I
98  
99  
AD01-P3P  
GND  
100  
102  
104  
106  
108  
110  
112  
114  
116  
118  
120  
122  
124  
N.C.  
-
101  
103  
105  
107  
109  
111  
113  
115  
117  
119  
121  
123  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
GND  
-
N.C.  
GND  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
GND  
GND  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
GND  
N.C.  
-
GND  
GND  
-
N.C.  
N.C.  
-
N.C.  
B3V  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.7  
PJ3000 MDC I/F connector (30-pin)  
Table C-7 MDC I/F connector (30-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
N.C  
I/O  
-
Pin No.  
2
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
-
-
3
GND  
-
4
N.C  
5
N.C  
-
6
N.C  
-
7
N.C  
-
8
GND  
-
9
N.C  
-
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
N.C  
-
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
GND  
-
MDC-B3V  
N.C  
I
MDC-B3V  
GND  
-
-
-
GND  
-
N.C  
-
M97SY2-P3P  
N.C  
I
M97OT2-P3P  
M97RS2-S3N  
GND  
I
-
I
M97IN2-B3P  
GND  
O
-
-
GND  
-
X97BMD-P3P  
I/O  
C-10  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C.8  
PJ3200 Keyboard I/F connector (34-pin)  
Table C-8 Keyboard I/F connector (34-pin)  
Pin No.  
1
Signal name  
NUMLED-P5N  
CAPLED-P5N  
KBSC00-S3N  
KBSC02-S3N  
KBSC04-S3N  
KBSC06-S3N  
KBSC07-S3N  
KBSC09-S3N  
KBRT02-S3N  
KBSC10-S3N  
KBRT04-S3N  
KBSC12-S3N  
KBRT06-S3N  
KBSC14-S3N  
P5V  
I/O  
I
Pin No.  
2
Signal name  
ARWLED-P5N  
P5V  
I/O  
I
3
I
4
-
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
6
KBSC01-S3N  
KBSC03-S3N  
KBSC05-S3N  
KBRT00-S3N  
KBSC08-S3N  
KBRT01-S3N  
KBRT03-S3N  
KBSC11-S3N  
KBRT05-S3N  
KBSC13-S3N  
KBRT07-S3N  
KBSC15-S3N  
N.C  
O
O
O
I
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
O
I
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
-
O
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
-
P5V  
-
C.9  
PJ3201 PAD I/F connector (8-pin)  
Table C-9 PAD I/F connector (8-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
-
-
2
4
6
8
-
-
GND  
N.C  
IPDCLK-P5P  
P5V  
I/O  
-
IPDDAT-P5P  
P5V  
I/O  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.10  
PJ3400 Parallel I/F Connector (25-pin)  
Table C-10 Parallel I/F connector (25-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
STROB-P5N  
PDB01-P5P  
PDB03-P5P  
PDB05-P5P  
PDB07-P5P  
BUSY-P5P  
SELCT-P5P  
ERROR-P5N  
SLIN-P5N  
GND  
I/O  
Pin No.  
2
Signal name  
PDB00-P5P  
PDB02-P5P  
PDB04-P5P  
PDB06-P5P  
ACK-P5N  
PE-P5P  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
1
3
I
I/O  
4
5
I/O  
6
7
I/O  
8
9
I/O  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
I
I
I
AUTFD-P5N  
PINIT-P5N  
GND  
O
O
-
I
O
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
C.11  
PJ4100 Network I/F connector (14-pin)  
Table C-11-1 PJ4100 Network I/F connector (14-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
(RCT)  
I/O  
-
Pin No.  
Signal name  
(RCT)  
I/O  
1
3
2
4
-
-
RX-  
I
(RCT)  
5
(RCT)  
-
6
RX+  
I
7
TX-  
O
-
8
TX+  
O
-
9
N.C  
10  
12  
14  
N.C  
11  
13  
ACT-E3N  
LNK-E3N  
O
O
(LAN-E3V)  
(LAN-E3V)  
-
-
C-12  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C.12  
PJ4200 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)  
Table C-12 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
TPB0-P3N  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
TPB0-P3P  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
1
3
2
4
TPA0-P3N  
TPA0-P3P  
C.13  
PJ5600 LCD connector (41-pin)  
Table C-13 LCD connector (41-pin)  
Pin No.  
1
Signal name  
BRT0-P5P  
BRT2DA-S3P  
TXCK1-P3N  
GND  
I/O  
O
O
O
-
PinNo.  
2
Signal name  
BRT1-P5P  
GND  
I/O  
O
-
3
4
5
6
TXCK1-P3P  
TXDT4-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
7
8
9
TXDT4-P3P  
TXDT5-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
TXDT5-P3P  
TXDT6-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
TXDT6-P3P  
TXCK0-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
TXCK0-P3P  
TXDTO-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
TXDTO-P3P  
TXDT1-P3N  
GND  
O
O
-
TXDT1-P3P  
TXDT2-P3N  
PNL0-P3P  
FL-P5V  
O
O
I
TXDT2-P3P  
FL-P5V  
O
-
-
FL-P5V  
-
PNL-3V  
-
PNL1-P3P  
GND  
I
PNL-P3V  
PNL2-P3P  
GND  
-
-
I
GND  
-
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.14  
PJ5621 CRT I/F connector (20-pin)  
Table C-14 CRT I/F connector (20-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
PinNo.  
2
Signal name  
TVLOUT-PXP  
TVCOUT-PXP  
N.C  
I/O  
O
O
-
1
3
-
-
GND  
4
5
GND  
-
6
7
DDC-P5V  
(AVSYNC-P3P)  
NVDSDA-P5P  
GND  
-
8
NVDSCL-P5P  
(AHSYNC-P3P)  
GND  
I/O  
O
-
9
I
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
I/O  
-
CRTBLU-PXP  
CRTGRN-PXP  
CRTRED-PXP  
GND  
O
-
VGAGND  
GND  
O
-
O
-
GND  
-
C.15  
C.16  
PJ6001 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)  
Table C- 15 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)  
Pin No.  
1
Signal name  
(MICIN-PXP)  
I/O  
I
Pin No.  
2
Signal name  
A-GND  
I/O  
-
PJ6004 Speaker Connector (left) (2-pin)  
Table C- 16 Speaker Connector (left) connector (2-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal Name  
I/O  
1
SPKOTL-EXN  
O
2
SPKOTL-EXP  
O
C-14  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C.17  
PJ6003 Speaker Connector (right) (3-pin)  
Table C-17 Speaker connector (right) pin assignment (3-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
SPKOTR-EXN  
SPKOTR-EXP  
I/O  
O
PinNo.  
Signal name  
N.C  
I/O  
1
3
2
-
O
C.18  
PJ7000 CD key I/F connector (18-pin)  
Table C-18 CD key I/F connector (18-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
M5V  
I/O  
-
PinNo.  
2
Signal name  
MP3MOD-E5N  
MODBTN-S3N  
CDNEXT-S5N  
CDSTOP-S5N  
BAT102-M5N  
M5V  
I/O  
O
I
1
3
CDMODE-E5N  
CDPREV-S5N  
CDPLAY-S5N  
GND  
O
I
4
5
6
I
7
I
8
I
9
-
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
O
-
11  
13  
15  
17  
BAT1B2-M5N  
PWLE02-M5N  
M5V  
O
O
-
PWLEB2-M5N  
DCINO2-M5N  
M5V  
O
O
-
DCINB2-M5N  
O
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.19  
PJ7001 Power switch I/F connector (15-pin)  
Table C-19 Power switch I/F connector (15-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
PWLEB3-M5N  
BTLED2-P5N  
ODLED2-M5N  
GND  
I/O  
O
O
O
-
PinNo.  
Signal name  
M5V  
I/O  
-
1
3
2
4
P5V  
-
5
6
M5V  
-
7
8
TVOBTN-S3N  
INETBTN-S3N  
SDLED2-P5N  
HDLED2-P5N  
I
9
ITCBTN-S3N  
PWRSW-S3N  
P5V  
I
10  
12  
14  
I
11  
13  
15  
I
O
O
-
P5V  
-
C.20  
PJ7002 Sound connector PCB I/F connector (20-pin)  
Table C-20 Sound connector PCB I/F connector (20-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
A-GND  
I/O  
-
PinNo.  
2
Signal name  
HPL-EXP  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
-
1
3
A-GND  
-
4
HPR-EXP  
A-GND  
5
HPIN-E4N  
MVREF2-P2V  
A-GND  
I
6
7
-
8
MIC-PXP  
I
9
-
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
MVREF1-P2V  
A-GND  
I
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
MICIN-P4N  
GND  
I
-
-
USBP1C-S3N  
GND  
O
-
USBP1C-S3P  
USBPOC-S3N  
USBOPS-E5V  
O
O
O
USBPOC-S3P  
USBOPS-E5V  
O
O
C-16  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
C.21  
C.22  
PJ7004 Panel switch I/F connector (2-pin)  
Table C-21 USB connector PCB I/F connector (2-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PinNo.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
PNLOFF-S3V  
I
2
-
PJ8810 1st Battery connector (7-pin)  
Table C-22 1st Battery connector (7-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
BTMP1  
I/O  
O
Pin No.  
Signal name  
(DCHG)  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
-
I/O  
-
(M5V)  
-
PSCL-S5P  
GND  
PSDA-S5P  
DBT10V-S5N  
I/O  
O
C.23  
C.24  
PJ8490 RTC Battery Connector (3-pin)  
Table C-23 RTC Battery connector pin assignment (3-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
(R3V)  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal Name  
N.C  
I/O  
1
3
-
-
2
-
GND  
PJ8770 FAN connector (3-pin)  
Table C-24 FAN connector (3-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
FAN VCC  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
-
I
2
GND  
-
FANG-P3P  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C.25  
PJ2000 Debugging port (4-pin)  
Table C-25 Debugging port (4-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
P3V  
-
2
DBGRX-P3P  
GND  
I
DBGTX-P3P  
O
4
-
C-18  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
Appendices  
(only for FMSSY* 32M)  
C.26  
PJ7003 USB connector PCB I/F connector (4-pin)  
Table C-26 USB connector PCB I/F connector (4-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
USB1PS-E5V  
USBP2C-S3P  
I/O  
O
PinNo.  
Signal name  
USBP2C-S3N  
GND  
I/O  
O
-
1
3
2
4
O
(only for FMSMP* 64M)  
C.27  
PJ7003 USB connector PCB I/F connector 1 (4-pin)  
Table C-27 USB connector PCB I/F connector 1 (4-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
USB1PS-E5V  
N.C  
I/O  
O
-
PinNo.  
Signal name  
N.C  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
2
4
-
-
C.28  
PJ7005 USB connector PCB I/F connector 2 (2-pin)  
Table C-28 USB connector PCB I/F connector 2 (2-pin)  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PinNo.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
USBP2C-S3N  
I
2
USBP2C-S3P  
I
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
C-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
C-20  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Appendices  
Appendix D  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)  
Code set 1  
Make Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
‘ ~  
1 !  
29  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
A9  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
0E  
16  
1E  
26  
25  
2E  
36  
3D  
3E  
46  
45  
4E  
55  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
0E  
16  
1E  
26  
25  
2E  
36  
3D  
3E  
46  
45  
4E  
55  
2 @  
3 #  
4 $  
5 %  
6 ^  
7 &  
8 *  
*2  
*2  
*2  
9 (  
0 )  
- _  
= +  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
BkSp  
Tab  
Q
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
13  
19  
1A  
1B  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
66  
0D  
15  
1D  
24  
2D  
2C  
35  
3C  
43  
44  
4D  
54  
5B  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
66  
0D  
15  
1D  
24  
2D  
2C  
35  
3C  
43  
44  
4D  
54  
5B  
W
E
R
T
Y
U
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
I
O
P
[ {  
] }  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
Keytop  
Note  
No.  
Make  
Break  
Make  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
\ |  
2B  
3A  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
AB  
BA  
9E  
9F  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
5D  
58  
1C  
1B  
23  
2B  
34  
33  
3B  
42  
4B  
4C  
52  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5D  
58  
1C  
1B  
23  
2B  
34  
33  
3B  
42  
4B  
4C  
52  
*5  
Caps Lock  
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
K
L
; :  
‘ “  
43  
44  
45  
Enter  
1C  
2A  
56  
9C  
AA  
D6  
5A  
12  
61  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5A  
12  
61  
*3  
Shift (L)  
No.102  
key  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
Z
X
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
1A  
22  
21  
2A  
32  
31  
3A  
41  
49  
4A  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
1A  
22  
21  
2A  
32  
31  
3A  
41  
49  
4A  
C
V
B
N
M
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
, <  
. >  
/ ?  
57  
Shift (R)  
36  
B6  
59  
F0  
59  
D-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
Break  
Make  
58  
Ctrl  
1D  
9D  
14  
F0  
14  
*3  
60  
61  
62  
Alt (L)  
Space  
38  
39  
B8  
B9  
11  
29  
F0  
F0  
11  
29  
11  
*3  
ALT (R)  
E0 38  
E0 B8 E0 11  
E0  
F0  
75  
76  
Ins  
E0 52  
E0 53  
E0 D2 E0 70  
E0 D3 E0 71  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
70  
71  
*1  
*1  
Del  
79  
80  
81  
E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
6B  
6C  
69  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Home  
End  
E0 47  
E0 4F  
E0 C7 E0 6C E0  
E0 CF E0 69  
E0  
83  
84  
85  
86  
E0 48  
E0 50  
E0 49  
E0 51  
E0 C8 E0 75  
E0 D0 E0 72  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
75  
72  
7D  
7A  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
PgUp  
PgDn  
E0 C9 E0 7D E0  
E0 D1 E0 7A E0  
89  
E0 4D E0 CD E0 74  
E0  
F0  
74  
*1  
110  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
Esc  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
01  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
81  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
76  
05  
06  
04  
0C  
03  
0B  
83  
0A  
01  
09  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
76  
05  
06  
04  
0C  
03  
0B  
83  
0A  
01  
09  
*3  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)  
Cap  
No.  
Code set 1  
Make Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
78  
122  
123  
124  
F11  
F12  
57  
58  
*6  
D7  
D8  
*6  
F0  
F0  
*6  
78  
07  
*3  
*3  
*6  
07  
*6  
PrintSc  
126  
Pause  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*4  
202  
203  
204  
Fn  
1F E0  
2F E0  
Win  
App  
E0  
E0  
5B E0 DB E0  
5D E0 DD E0  
F0  
F0  
1F  
2F  
Notes:  
1. * Scan codes differ by mode.  
2. * Scan codes differ by overlay function.  
3. * Combined with the Fn key makes different codes.  
4. * Fn key does not generate a code by itself.  
5. * This key corresponds to key No. 42 in a 102-key model.  
6. * Refer to Table D-6, No. 124 key scan code.  
7. * Refer to Table D-7, No. 126 key scan code.  
D-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key  
Cap  
No.  
Key  
top  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
55  
75  
76  
79  
/
E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12  
E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12  
INS  
DEL E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12  
Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12  
80  
81  
End  
E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12  
83  
84  
85  
PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12  
PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12  
86  
89  
E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12  
E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12  
203  
204  
Win  
App  
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key. In combination with  
the right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:  
With left Shift  
With right Shift  
Set 1  
Set 2  
E0 AA ___________E0 B6  
E0 2A ____________E0 36  
E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59  
E0 12 ____________E0 59  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode  
Cap  
No.  
Key  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
top  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
75  
76  
INS  
DEL  
E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12  
79  
80  
Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12  
81  
End  
E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12  
83  
84  
85  
PgUp  
PgDn  
86  
89  
203  
204  
Win  
App  
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key  
Cap  
Code set 1  
Make Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
No.  
Keytop  
Make  
5A  
43  
58  
ENT  
CTRL  
E0  
E0  
E0  
1C  
1D  
38  
E0  
E0  
E0  
9C  
9D  
B8  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5A  
14  
11  
14  
11  
60  
LALT  
121  
122  
123  
ARROW  
45  
45  
46  
C5  
77  
77  
7E  
F0  
F0  
F0  
77  
77  
7E  
NUMERIC  
Scrl  
C5  
C5  
D-6  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode  
Code set 1  
Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
(8)  
Make  
Make  
09  
10  
11  
23  
24  
25  
26  
37  
38  
39  
40  
52  
54  
55  
8
9
0
U
I
48  
49  
37  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4A  
4F  
50  
51  
4E  
52  
53  
C8  
C9  
B7  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CA  
CF  
D0  
D1  
CE  
D2  
D3  
75  
7D  
7C  
6B  
73  
74  
7B  
69  
72  
7A  
79  
70  
71  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
75  
7D  
7C  
6B  
73  
74  
7B  
69  
72  
7A  
79  
70  
71  
(9)  
(*)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(–)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(+)  
(0)  
(.)  
O
P
J
K
L
;
M
.
/
(/)  
E0  
35  
E0  
B5  
40  
4A  
E0  
F0  
4A  
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code  
Key  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Shift  
top  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12  
E0 37  
E0 37  
54  
E0 B7  
E0 B7  
D4  
E0 7C  
E0 7C  
84  
E0 F0 7C  
E0 F0 7C  
F0 B4  
Ctrl +  
Shift +  
Alt +  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes  
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code  
Key  
top  
Shift  
Code set 1  
Make  
Code set 2  
Make  
Pause Common E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14  
*
F0 77  
Ctrl*  
E0 46 E0 C6  
E0 7E E0 F0 7E  
*: This key generates only make codes.  
D-8  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E Key Layout  
Appendices  
Appendix E  
Appendix E Key Layout  
E.1 United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard  
Figure E-1 UK keyboard  
E.2 United States (US) Keyboard  
Figure E-2 US keyboard  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix E Key Layout  
E-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams  
Appendices  
Appendix F  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams  
F.1 Parallel Port Wraparound Connector  
-SELECT  
-PINT  
Figure F-1 Parallel port wraparound connector  
F.2 LAN Loopback Connector  
(3) BIDBP (RX+)  
(6) BIDBN (RX-)  
(1) BIBAP (TX+)  
(2) BIDAN (TX-)  
Figure F-2 LAN loopback Connector  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams  
F-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
Appendices  
Appendix G  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the  
system BIOS.  
Tools  
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:  
BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.  
Rewriting the BIOS  
1. Set the system to boot mode.  
2. Turn off the power to the computer.  
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.  
4. Connect an external FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into either the  
external FDD.  
5. Turn on the power while holding down the No. 01 key.  
For example  
(US Keyboard)  
(UK Keyboard)  
(Keep holding down the key until a message appears on the screen.)  
The BIOS rewriting starts.  
6. When the process is completed, eject the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the  
system is automatically reset.  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
G-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix I Reliability  
Appendices  
Appendix I  
Appendix I Reliability  
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time between Failures).  
Table I-1 MTBF  
MTBF  
Time (hours)  
VRAM32MB (FMSSY* board) model  
VRAM64MB (FMSMP* board) model  
7323.49  
7341.30  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix I Reliability  
I-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix J SETUP  
Appendices  
Appendix J  
Appendix J SETUP  
This function displays the current system setup information. The options are listed blow.  
1. Main  
(1) Total Memory  
(2) System Date  
(3) System Time  
(4) BIOS Ver.  
2. Advanced  
(1) Power On Display  
(2) LCD Display Stretch  
(3) TV Type  
(4) Dynamic CPU Freq Mode  
(5) Built-in LAN  
(6) Network Boot Protocol  
(7) Wake-up On LAN  
(8) Internal Pointing Device  
(9) Parallel Port Mode  
3. Security  
(1) Power on Password  
4. Boot  
(1) Hard Drive  
(2) Removable Devices  
(3) CD/DVD-ROM Drive  
(4) Network Boot  
5. Exit  
(1) Exit Saving Changes  
(2) Exit Discarding Changes  
(3) Load Setup Defaults  
(4) Discard Changes  
(5) Save Changes  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
J-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix J SETUP  
To access the SETUP display, power on the computer and while “TOSHIBA” logo is  
displayed, press [F2]. Then, the main menu similar to the one blow appears.  
There are five tabs (Main, Advanced, Security, Boot and Exit) in the SETUP menu. To move  
between the tabs, press or . Each option is displayed on the menu by selecting a tab.  
“Item Specific Help” on the right of the menu describes each option.  
Figure J-1 Main menu  
SETUP Options  
The SETUP screen is divided into functionally related groups. This section describes each  
group and its options.  
Main  
1. Total Memory  
This option displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically  
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.  
2. System Date  
This option is used to set the date of the computer. To change the value, press [F5] or  
[F6] and press [Enter] to select the value.  
System Date  
3. System Time  
Sets the date.  
This option is used to set the time of the computer. To change the value, press [F5] or  
[F6] and press [Enter] to select the value.  
System Time  
4. BIOS Ver.  
Sets the time.  
This option displays the BIOS version of the computer. You cannot change this value.  
J-2  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix J SETUP  
Appendices  
Advanced  
1. Power On Display  
[Auto-Selected]  
If any external display is connected, the power on display will  
be in analog RGB only mode. Otherwise it will be in LCD  
only mode.  
[LCD+Analog RGB] Display both the integrated LCD screen and analog RGB  
screen mode.  
2. LCD Display Stretch  
[Enabled]  
[Disabled]  
LCD display stretch is enabled.  
LCD display stretch is disabled.  
3. TV Type  
This option sets the TV type options.  
[NTSC (US)]  
[NTSC (JAPAN)]  
[PAL]  
TV in the U.S. system  
TV in Japanese system  
TV in Europe system  
4. Dynamic CPU Freq Mode  
[Switchable]  
[Always High]  
[Always Low]  
5. Built-in LAN  
[Enabled]  
CPU frequency is dynamically switchable.  
CPU frequency is always high.  
CPU frequency is always low.  
Built-in LAN is enabled.  
Built-in LAN is disabled.  
[Disabled]  
6. Network Boot Protocol  
[PXE]  
Network boot by the PXE protocol.  
Network boot by the RPL protocol.  
[RPL]  
7. Wake-up On LAN  
[Enabled]  
Wake-up is enabled from Built-in LAN.  
Wake-up is disabled from Built-in LAN.  
[Disabled]  
8. Internal Pointing Device  
[Enabled]  
Internal pointing device is enabled.  
Internal pointing device is disabled.  
[Disabled]  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
J-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix J SETUP  
9. Parallel Port Mode  
This option sets the mode for the parallel port using options.  
[ECP]  
Sets the port type to Extended Capabilities Port (ECP). For  
most printers, the port should be set to “ECP.” (Default)  
[Bi-derectional]  
This setting should be used with some other parallel devices.  
Security  
1. Power On Password  
To set a new user password, press [Enter] and enter the new password twice.  
[Not Registered]  
[Registered]  
The password has not been registered.  
The password has been registered.  
Boot  
This option displays boot sequence of devices of the computer.  
Hard Drive  
mainly for HDD  
Removable Devices  
CD/DVD-ROM Drives  
Network Boot  
mainly for FDD  
mainly for CD/DVD-ROM  
mainly for LAN  
Exit  
1. Exit Saving changes  
Exit System Setup and save your changes to CMOS.  
2. Exit Discarding Changes  
Exit utility without saving Setup changes data to CMOS.  
3. Load Setup Defaults  
Load default values for all Setup items.  
4. Discard Changes  
Load previous values from CMOS for all Setup Items.  
5. Save Changes  
Save Setup data to CMOS.  
J-4  
Satellite M30-35 Maintenance Manual (960-455)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Thule Automobile Accessories 003 User Manual
Toshiba All in One Printer 3511 User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD 6980SY User Manual
Toshiba Laptop U305 S7448 User Manual
Toshiba Network Card P000233790 User Manual
Toshiba Printer B 450 QP SERIES User Manual
Toshiba Security Camera IK 6420A User Manual
Tripp Lite Surge Protector IS250 User Manual
Vienna Acoustics Speaker Subson User Manual
VuPoint Solutions Scanner PDS ST510 VP User Manual